Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 12/ 20
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and il lustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
C
Copyright 2012 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 12/ 20
This manual describes the following vehicle types.*
* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.
Black plate (3,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Warranties
& Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the
United States come with the following
warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control Systems Warranty
. Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclu sions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenan ce Bookl et”.
Please read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty
. Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclu sions, is in the
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please
read these warranties carefully.
& Models with HID headlights
CAUTION
High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-
lights contain mercury. For that
reason, it is necessary to remove
HID headlights before vehicle dis-
posal. Once removed, please reuse,
recycle or dispose of the HID head-
lights as hazardous waste.
& Models without HID head-
lights
NOTE
This vehicle does not contain mercury
devices or parts.
How to use this Owner’s
Manual
& Using your Owner’s Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed o f fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
1
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate
your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem while driving, such as a
flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Uniform
tire quality grading standards and Report-
ing safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
& Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understand-
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
& Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “ Do
not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Abbreviation list
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
A/C Air conditioner
A/ELR
Automatic/Emergency locking
retractor
ABS Anti-lock brake system
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
AT Automatic transmission
ATF Automatic transmission fluid
AWD All-wheel drive
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
FWD Front-wheel drive
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
HID High intensity discharge
INT Intermittent
Abbreviation Meaning
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
LED Light emitting diode
LSD Limited slip differential
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl
MT Manual transmission
OBD On-board diagnostics
RON Research octane number
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
Vehicle symbols
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F21.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Power door lock
Power door unlock
Power window with automatic
open (all models) and close (if
equipped) function
Passengers’ windows lock
and unlock
Fuel
Front fog lights
3
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4
Mark Name
Hazard warning flasher
Engine hood
Seat heater
Child restraint top tether an-
chorages
Child restraint lower an-
chorages
Horn
Wiper intermittent
Windshield washer
Windshield wiper mist (for
single wipe)
Rear window wiper
Rear window washer
Mark Name
Lights
Tail lights, license plate light
and instrument panel illumi-
nation
Headlights
Turn signal
Illumination brightness
Fan speed
Instrument panel outlets
Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
Foot outlets
Windshield defroster and foot
outlets
Windshield defroster
Mark Name
Rear window defogger/Out-
side mirror defogger
Air recirculation
Engine oil
Washer
Door lock (Transmitter)
Door unlock (Transmitter)
Rear gate (Transmitter)
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Safety precautions when
driving
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFO RE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accide nt, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) airbag does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts.
In combination with the seat-
belts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags dep loy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-12.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Suppl emental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-33.
& Child safety
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passen-
ger and objects inside the vehi-
cle.
. While riding in the vehicle, in-
fants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for
the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a
child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and
be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children aged 12 and under in
the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt.
5
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6
The SRS ai rbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are 12
years of age and under and are
not restrained or improperly re-
strained . B ecause children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the “LOCK” position when
children sit on the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opens the door
and falls out. Refer to “Ch ild
safety locks” F2-19.
. Always lock the passenger’s win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” F2-20.
. Never leave unattended children
in the vehicle. They could acci-
dentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, temperature
in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries
to them.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-12.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-22.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Suppl emental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-33.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoi d remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reactions and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking – even if you drink just a
little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken dr iving is one o f the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-
hol affects all people differently, you may
have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
blood is below the legal limit. The safest
thing you can do is never drink and drive.
However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-
tely before getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reactions and impair
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reactions will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentive-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
when tire d or sleepy, yo ur, your
passengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
7
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8
& Modification of your vehicle
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durabi lity,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
& Car phone/cell phone and
driving
WARNING
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and p ark in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
& Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collisi on or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
strain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
in the front passenger’s seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protection society or pet
shop.
& Tire pressures
Check a nd, if necessary, adjust th e
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to “Tires and wheels” F11-29.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become ho t. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& On-road and off-road driving
This vehicle is classified as a utility
vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground
clearance and higher center of gravity,
making it more likely to roll over than
ordinary passenger cars. It also handles
and m aneuvers differently from other
passenger cars. For this reason, please
read carefully the following section and
follow the instructions and precautions in
order to prevent serious injury or death
due to loss of control, rollover and other
accidents. Refer to “On-road and off-road
driving” F8-6.
General information
& California proposition 65
warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents c ontain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
& California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
Certain vehicle components such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
& Noise from under the vehicle
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the engine is turned off. However,
this does not indicate a malfunction.
This noise is caused by the operation
of the fuel evaporation leakage check-
ing system and is normal. The noise
will stop after approximately 15 min-
utes.
9
0
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Keys and doors
2
Instruments and controls
Climate control
4
Audio
5
Interior equipment
6
Starting and operating
7
Driving tips
8
In case of emergency
9
Appearance care
10
Maintenance and service
11
Specifications
12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
3
北米Model "A8180BE-A" Edited: 2011/ 12/ 20
Black plate (14,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12
Illustrated index
& Exterior
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
2) Headlight switch (page 3-29)
3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-45)
4) Wiper switch (page 3-34)
5) Moonroof (page 2-24)
6) Roof rail (page 8-14)
7) Door locks (page 2-4)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-31)
9) Flat tires (page 9-6)
10) Tire chains (page 8-11)
11) Front fog light switch (page 3-32)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
13) Towing hook (page 9-14)
Black plate (18,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
16
& Instrument panel
1) Door locks (page 2-4)
2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-43)
3) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-31)
4) Light control lever (page 3-29)
5) Combination meter (page 3-6)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-33)
7) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-5)
8) Audio (page 5-1)
9) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-13)/
Select lever (AT) (page 7-15)
10) Climate control (page 4-1)
11) Cruise control (page 7-32)
12) Horn (page 3-47)
13) SRS airbag (page 1-33)
14) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-46)
15) Hands-free switches (page 5-42)
16) Audio control buttons (page 5-37)
17) Fuse box (page 11-44)
18) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-27)
19) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5)
20) Power windows (page 2-20)
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-34)
2) Mist (page 3-35)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-35)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-35)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-34)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-33)
7) Light control switch (page 3-29)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-32)
9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-29)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-30)
11) Turn signal (page 3-31)
17
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (20,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
18
& Combination meter
! Type A
1) Tachometer (page 3-10)
2) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
3) Select lever and gear position indicator
(page 3-24)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Information display switching knob
(page 3-26)
6) ECO gauge (page 3-11)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
9) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Type B (U.S.-spec. models)
1) Tachometer (page 3-10)
2) Speedometer (page 3-8)
3) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-8)
6) Select lever and gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-24)
7) Coolant temperature low indicator light/
Coolant temperature high warning light
(page 3-16)
19
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
20
! Type B (except U.S.-spec. models)
1) Tachometer (page 3-10)
2) Speedometer (page 3-8)
3) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-8)
6) Select lever and gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-24)
7) Coolant temperature low indicator light/
Coolant temperature high warning light
(page 3-16)
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Warning and indicator lights
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-13
Front passenger’s seat-
belt warning light
3-13
SRS airbag system
warning light
3-14
/
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag ON indicator
3-15
/
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag OFF indicator
3-15
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunction
indicator light
3-15
Coolant temperature low
indicator light (if
equipped)/Coolant tem-
perature high warning
light (if equipped)
3-16
Charge warning light 3-17
Oil pressure warning
light
3-17
AT OIL TEMP warning
light (AT models)
3-17
Mark Name Page
/ ABS warning light 3-19
/
Brake system warning
light
3-20
Door open warning light 3-21
AWD warning light
(AT models)
3-21
Hill start assist warning
light (MT models)
3-21
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control op-
eration indicator light
3-22
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol OFF indicator light
3-23
Turn signal indicator
lights
3-24
High beam indicator light 3-24
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (models with HID
headlights)
3-21
Mark Name Page
Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
3-25
Security indicator light 3-23
Headlight indicator light 3-25
Cruise control indicator
light
3-24
Cruise control set indi-
cator light
3-25
Low fuel warning light 3-21
Low tire pressure warn-
ing light
(U.S.-spec. models)
3-18
SPORT mode indicator
light (AT models)
3-24
21
0
Black plate (24,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
22
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with the genuine SUBARU DVD navigation system, the settings for
some of these functions can be changed using the navigation monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for
the navigation system.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Monitoring start delay time (after closure of
doors)
0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds
Impact sensor operation (only models with
shock sensors [dealer option])
Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
Dome light/map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF
Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Remote engine start system
(dealer option)
Horn chirp confirmation ON/OFF ON
Defogger and deicer system for
models with the automatic cli-
mate control system
Rear window defogger, outside mirror de-
fogger and windshield wiper deicer
Operation for 15 minutes/
Continuous operation
Operation for 15 minutes
Map light/Dome light Operation of map light/dome light OFF delay
timer
OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long
Battery drainage prevention
function
Battery drainage prevention function* Operation/Non-operation Operation
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation
*: The setting can only be changed at a SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Manual seat ........................................................ 1-3
Power seat (driver’s seat – if equipped) ............... 1-4
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-5
Active head restraint ........................................... 1-6
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-6
Rear seats............................................................ 1-7
Armrest .............................................................. 1-8
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8
Reclining the seatback (if equipped) ................... 1-10
Folding down the rear seatback .......................... 1-10
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-12
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-12
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-13
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-13
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-13
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-13
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-19
Front seatbelt pretensioners............................. 1-20
System monitors ............................................... 1-21
System servicing ............................................... 1-21
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-22
Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-22
Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-23
Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-24
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
seatbelt ........................................................... 1-25
Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-28
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-29
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-32
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................................................ 1-33
Models with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
restraints for driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers........................... 1-33
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-37
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-47
SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-57
SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-58
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-59
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Black plate (28,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-
trol and personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers and cargo are
clear of the adjusting mechan-
ism.
. After adjusting the seat, push it
slightly to make sure it is se-
curely locked. If the seat is not
securely locked, it may move or
the seatbelt may not operate
properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking and cause an
accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the fr ont seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. The SRS airbags dep loy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Put children aged 12 and under in
the rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are 12 years of age
and under and are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because chil-
dren are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured
from deployment is greater. For that
reason, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including those
in child seats and those that have
outgrown child restraint devices) sit
in the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child
Black plate (29,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
restraint device or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. Se-
cure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seat) in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning child restraint sys-
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” F1-22.
& Manual seat
! Forward and backward adjustment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position. Then release the
lever and move the seat back and forth to
make sure that it is securely locked into
place.
! Reclining the seatback
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then
release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
the lever is pulled. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (30,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
! Seat cushion height adjustment
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
is lowered.
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
The height of the seat can be adjusted by
moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up and down.
& Power seat (driver’s seat – if
equipped)
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad-
Black plate (31,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, tilt
the control switch forward or backward.
4) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch
To increase lumbar support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease
lumbar support, push the rear side of the
switch.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
& Head restraint adjustment
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Both the driver ’s seat and the f ront
passenger’s seat are equipped with head
restraints.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
straints to protect vehicle occu-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (32,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
pants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
& Active head restraint
The front seats of your vehicle are
equipped with active head restraints. They
automatically tilt forward slightly in the
event the vehicle is struck from the rear,
decreasing the amount of rearward head
movement and thus reducing the risk of
whiplash. For maximum effectiveness, the
head restraint should be adjusted so that
the center of the head restraint is closest
to the top of the occupant’s ears.
CAUTION
. Each active head restraint is
effective only when its height is
properly adjusted and driver/pas-
senger sits in the correct posi-
tion on the seat.
. If your vehicle is involved in a
rear-end collision, have an
authorized SUBARU dealer in-
spect the active head restraints.
. The active head restraints may
not operate i n the event the
vehicle experiences only a slight
impact in the rear.
. The active head restraints may be
damaged if they are pushed hard
from behind or subje cted to
shock. As a result, they may not
function if the vehicle suffers a
rear impact.
Seat heater (if equipped)
CAUTION
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the seat heater
for a long period of time. When
using the heater, always be sure
to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
Black plate (33,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1) HI – Rapid heating
2) LO – Normal heating
3) OFF – Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
The seat heater operates when the igni-
tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
To turn on the seat heater, press the “LO”
or “HI” position on the switch, as desired,
depending on the temperature.
Selecting the “HI” position will cause the
seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
opposite side of the current position.
The indicator next to the switch illuminates
when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
Rear seats
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (34,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
& Armrest
To lower the armrest, pull the top edge of
the armrest down.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury, passengers
must never be allowed to sit on the
center armrest while the vehicle is in
motion.
& Head restraint adjustment
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
straints to protect vehicle occu-
pants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
Black plate (35,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Rear windows side seating position
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
A) When not used (retracted position)
B) When used (extended position)
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
extended position.
When the rear center seating position is
not occupied, lower the head restraint to
improve rearward visibility.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (36,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Reclining the seatback (if
equipped)
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a
cargo area cover, observe the fol-
lowing precautions.
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the head restraint and
the cargo area cover when you
recline the rear seat.
. Move the front cover of the cargo
area cover backward so that the
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to “Car-
go area cover (dealer option)”
F6-14.
Push the switch and adjust the seatback
to the desired position.
Then release the switch and make sure
the seatback is securely locked into place.
& Folding down the rear seat-
back
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat-
back, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the
rear seat. Not doing so creates
a risk of injury or property da-
mage if the seatback suddenly
folds down.
. For models equipped with the
rear seat center table, return the
rear seat center table to it s
original position before folding
down the rear seatback. If the
rear seat center table is not
returned to its original position,
the rear seat center table could
break and bodily injury could
occur.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury or death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
Black plate (37,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneu-
ver or a rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may sud-
denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area,
which could cause serious injury
or death.
. After returning the rear seatback
to its original position, be certain
to place all of the seatbelts and
the tab attached to the seat
cushion above the seat cushion.
Also, make certain that the
shoulder belts are fully visible.
CAUTION
For models with the reclining func-
tion, the rear seatback may auto-
matically and forcefully fold down
because of its internal spring. Place
your hand on the seatback to lower
it more gradually.
Release knob
One-touch seatback folding lever (if
equipped)
1. Lower the head restraints.
2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the
release knob or the one-touch seatback
folding lever, and then fold the seatback
down.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that it is securely
locked.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11
1
Black plate (38,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFO RE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed t o
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
. Put children aged 12 and under in
the rear seat properly restrained
at all time s. The SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. For that
reason, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (incl uding
those in child seats and those
that have outgrown child re-
straint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height
and weight.
Secure ALL types of child re-
straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-22.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal
and side airbags deploy.
! Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child
restraint systems” F1-22.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt
anchor height (window-side seating posi-
Black plate (39,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
tions only) and then if necessary move the
child closer to the belt buckle to help
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must
be taken to securely place the lap belt as
low as possible on the hips and not on the
child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an addi tional locking mode,
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode”, intended to secure a child restraint
system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released
and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats using a seatbelt, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the
ALR mode. For instructions on how to
install the child restraint system using a
seatbelt, refer to “Installing child restraint
systems with A/ELR seatbelt” F1-25.
When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the ELR mode by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and
chime” F3-13.
& Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of a cross the weaker
abdomen.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (40,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the fr ont seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious i nternal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weath-
er; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position according to
the following procedure.
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
Black plate (41,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of th e
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
down.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
it is locked in place.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (42,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
seatbelt)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle
Black plate (43,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web-
bing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, espe-
cially when inserting the connec-
tor’s tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
WARNING
. Be sure to fasten both tongue
plates to the respective buckles.
If the seatbelt is used only as a
shoulder belt (with the connec-
tor’s tongue plate not fastened to
the co nnector’s buckle on the
right-hand side), it cannot prop-
erly restrain the wearer in posi-
tion in an accident, possibly
resulting in serious injury or
death.
. Before fastening the seatbelt,
confirm that the seatbelt is rou-
ted through the belt guide. A
seatbelt not routed through the
belt guide can cause neck inju-
ries during sudden braking or in
a collision since it may slip on
your neck.
The rear center seatbelt is stowed in a
recessed compartment lo cated in th e
ceiling above the cargo area.
1. Remove the tongue plate from the slot
in the recessed compartment and pull out
the seatbelt slowly.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (44,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
2. Pass the seatbelt through the belt
guide.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle marked
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Black plate (45,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1. Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
2. Insert a key or other hard pointed
object into the slot in the c onnector
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push
it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
disconnect from the buckle.
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
the recessed compartment and then insert
the connector (tongue) plate into the slot.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue
plates may hit and damage the
trim.
. Make sure that the seatbelt is
fully rolled up so that the tongue
plates are neatly stored. A hang-
ing tongue plate can swing and
hit and damage the trim while
driving.
& Seatbelt maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (46,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners for the driver’s seat
and front passenger’s seat operate at the
same time as the frontal, and side SRS
airbags. If the vehicle rolls over, they
operate simultaneously with the curtain
airbag.
The front and side airbag sensors and the
rollover sensor are used as the preten-
sioner sensors. If a sensor detects a
certain predetermined amount of force
during a frontal collision, a side impact
collision or a rollover collision, the front
seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the
retractor to take up the slack so that the
belt more effectively restrains the front
seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor frontal or
side impacts or in rear impacts.
. The driver’s seat and passenger’s
seat pretensioners and frontal, side or
curtain SRS airbags operate simulta-
neously.
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
replaced only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
belt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
Black plate (47,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or surrounding area has b een
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
buyer to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” F1-12.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt preten-
sioners or could make the sys-
tem inoperative, possibly result-
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-ser-
viceable parts. For required ser-
vicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners, see your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& System monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the SRS airbag system.
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
system warning light will illuminate. For
details, refer to “SRS airbag system
monitors” F1-57.
& System servicing
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag
systems. For required servicing
of the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
CAUTION
The front sub sensors are located
on both the right and left sides at the
front of the vehicle, and the SRS
airbag control module including the
impact sensors is located under the
center console. If you need service
or repair in those areas or near the
front seatbelt retractors, have the
work performed by your authorized
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle was
damaged in an accident, contact your
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (48,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
even if the seatbelt pretensioner did
not operate in that accident.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equi pment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
patible with your vehicle and is appro-
priate for the child’s age and size. All child
restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
child restraint systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-29).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, care-
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap or in his or her
arms while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the
Black plate (49,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
child from injury in a collision,
because the child will be caught
between the passenger and objects
inside the vehicle.
Additionally, holding a child in your
lap or arms in the front seat exposes
that child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
& Where to place a child re-
straint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
dations on where to place a child restraint
system in your vehicle.
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
installing a child restraint system.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
Installing a child restraint system is not
recommended, although the A/ELR seat-
belt and an upper anch orage (tether
anchorage) are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (50,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
If it is un avoidable to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat’s center
seating position, lower the center head
restraint to the lowest position and install
the child restraint system by correctly
passing the rear center seatbelt through
the belt guide.
WARNING
Put children aged 12 and under in
the rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are 12 years of age
and under and are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because chil-
dren are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured
from deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint devices
(including forward facin g child
seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
You should choose a restraint de-
vice which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. Ac-
cording to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
WARNING
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’ S
SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A
REARWARD FACING CHILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’SHEADTOOCLOSETO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
& Choosing a child restraint
system
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protecti on. The child
restraint system should meet all applic-
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards for the United States
or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards for Canada. It can be identified by
looking for the label on the child restraint
system or the manufacturer’s statement of
compliance in the document attached to
the system.
Also it is important for you to make sure
that the child restraint system is compa-
tible with the vehicle in which it will be
used.
Black plate (51,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Installing child restraint sys-
tems with A/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (52,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
6. Push and pull the child restraint
system forward and from side to side to
check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a
child restraint can be more firmly secured
by pushing it down into the seat cushion
and then tightening the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
8. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’SSEAT.DOINGSO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
Black plate (53,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
6. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, move it back and forth
and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
be more firmly secured by pushing it down
into the seat cushion and then tightening
the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
8. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anc hor age an d ti ghten the top
tether. For additional instructions, refer to
“Top tether anchorages” F1-32.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (54,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
9. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a booster seat
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
Black plate (55,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Placethelapbeltaslowas
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
& Installation of child restraint
systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your
vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
child restraint systems are secured to the
designated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
chorages are sometimes referred to as the
LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (56,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
modating such child restraint systems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system only on
the rear seat window-side seating posi-
tions. For each window-side seating posi-
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided at the locations
shown in the above illustration.
1) Cover
You will find marks “ ” on the cover at the
bottom of the rear seat seatbacks. These
marks indicate the positions of the lower
anchorages (bars).
1. Open the covers of the two lower
Black plate (57,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
anchorages (bars) for the position where
you want to install the child restraint
system.
2. While following the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint system manu-
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages. When the hooks are
connected, make sure the adjacent seat-
belts are not caught.
3. [If your child restraint system is of a
flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts to connect the child restraint
system properly to the lower anchorages)]
While pushing the child restraint into the
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt.
4. Connect the top tether hook to the
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages”
F1-32.
5. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to verify that it is
held securely in position.
6. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (58,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Top tether anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
! Anchorage location
1) For right seat
2) For center seat
3) For left seat
There is an anchorage located on the rear
edge of the ceiling above each seating
position.
! To hook the top tether
CAUTION
Always remove the head restraint
when mounting a chi ld restra int
system with a top tether. Otherwise,
the top tether cannot be fastened
tightly.
1. Remove the head restraint at the
window-side seating position where the
child restraint system has been installed
with the lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift
up the head restraint while pressing the
release button. Store the head restraint in
the cargo area. Avoid placing the head
restraint in the passenger compartment to
Black plate (59,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
prevent it from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sudden stop
or a sharp turn.
2. Open the cover for the appropriate
upper anchorage.
3. Attach the child restraint top tether
hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
Please contact your SUBARU dealer if
you have any question regard ing the
installation of a child restraint system.
*SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-
straint system. This name is used be-
cause the airbag system supplements the
vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
& Models with SRS airbags and
lap/shoulder restraints for
driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system in addition to a
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position and each rear window-side seat-
ing positions. The supplemental restraint
system (SRS) consists of six airbags.
The configurations are as follows.
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (60,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
gers)
These SRS airbags are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” F1-20.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accide nt, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS airbag is designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. It does not eliminate the
need to fasten seatbelts. In com-
bination with the seatbelts, it
offers the best combined protec-
tion in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-12.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed – faster than
the blink of an eye – and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-acci-
dent braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms
because of the SRS airbag de-
ployment force.
. The SRS airbags dep loy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, those
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
Black plate (61,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
WARNING
. Put children aged 12 and under in
the rear seat properly restrained
at all times. The SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly
recommend that ALL children
(including those in child seats
and those that have outgrown
child restraint devices) sit in the
REAR seat properly restrained at
all times in a child restraint
device or in a seatbelt, whichever
is appropriate for the child’s age,
height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child re-
straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint
system, refer to “Child restraint
systems” F1-22.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Never allow a child to stand up,
or to kneel on the front passen-
ger’s seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The
SRS airbag deploys with consid-
erable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (62,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Components
1) Airbag control module (including impact
and rollover sensors)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side)
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-
sor
19) Front passe nger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
20) Front passe nger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
Black plate (63,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements i n the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de-
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-
ment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed
in the center portion of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is stowed near the top of the dashboard
under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags deploy and supplement the
seatbelts by reducing the impact on the
driver’s and front passenger’s head and
chest.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up, or to
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (64,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable speed and force. Occu-
pants who are out of proper position
when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well
back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that
can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during pre-
accident braking.
WARNING
Do not put any objects over the
steering wheel pad and dashboard.
If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
these objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be pro-
pelled inside the vehicle, causing
injury.
Black plate (65,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the rear view mirror. If the
SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could
seriously injure vehicle occupants.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
Have the system inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
NOTE
The driver’s SRS side airbag, SRS
curtain airbag a nd seatbe lt preten-
sioner are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
The total load on the seat is monitored by
the occupant detection system’s weight
sensor located under the seat.
The system has another sensor that
monitors the tension of the front passen-
ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and
seatbelt tension data from the sensors,
the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag should or should not be inflated.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system from
functioning correctly or cause the system
to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact to the
front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.
. Do not spill liquid on the front passen-
ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory (such as
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine
SUBARU accessory under the front pas-
senger’s seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-
la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.
. The front passenger’s seat must not be
used with the head restraint removed.
. Do not leave any article including a
child restraint system on the front passen-
ger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and
buckle engaged when you leave your
vehicle.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their back-
ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For the adjustment procedure of
the manual seats, refer to “Manual seat”
F1-3.
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (66,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU deal-
er immediately if the SRS airbag system
warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag,
SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre-
tensioner are n ot controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON and OFF indicators” F3-15.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding the
front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with a rearward
facing child restraint system and an infant
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a forward
facing child restraint system and a small
child is restrained with it. (See WARNING
that follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a booster
seat and a small child is in the booster
seat. (See WARNING that follows.)
. The seat is relieved of the occupant
load for a time exceeding the predeter-
mined monitoring time period.
. The seat is occupied by a child who
has outgrown a child restraint system or
by a small adult. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
recommended that any forward fa-
cing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also
seated in the REAR seat. This is
because children sitting in the front
passenger’s seat may be killed or
severely injured should the fro nt
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
ploy. REAR seats are the safest
place for children.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
pied by a child, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may increase
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
activating the front passenger’sSRS
frontal airbag even though that seat is
occupied by a child.
. Do not place any article on the seat
other than the child occupant and a child
restraint system.
. Do not place more than one child on
the seat.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
Black plate (67,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! If the front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when
an infant or a small child is in a child
restraint system (including booster
seat)
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK ”
position if the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when an
infant or a small child is in a child restraint
system (including booster seat). Remove
the child restraint system from the seat. By
referring to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s recommendations as well as the
child restraint system installation proce-
dures in “Child restraint systems” F1-22,
correctly install the child restraint system.
Turn the igni tion swi tch to t he “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking rele vant cor rectiv e actio ns de-
scribed above, relocate the child restraint
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer fo r an
inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag is activated (the ON
indicator remains illuminated while
the OFF indicator turns off), take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in
the seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
nates while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and im-
mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Even if the system
has passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
tions are met regarding the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When a heavy article is placed on the
seat.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
pied by an adult, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
deactivating the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
is occupied by an adult.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (68,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the front
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article
from behind and under the seat. This may
lift the seat cushion.
. Do not squeeze any article between
the front passenger’s seat and side trim/
pillar, door or center console box. This
may lift the seat cushion.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator illuminates and the ON
indicator turns off even when the
front passenger’s seat is occupied
by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incor-
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK ”
position. Ask the front passenger to set
the seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position. Turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF
indicator remains illuminated while the ON
indicator remains off, take the following
actions.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
. Ensure that there are no articles,
books, shoes, or other objects trapped
under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or
on the side of the seat.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
. Next, turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica-
tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON
indicator should illuminate while the OFF
indicator remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
! How to contact the vehicle manu-
facturer concerning modifications
for persons with disabilities that
may affect the advanced airbag
system (U.S. only)
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
steering column, tire, suspension or floor
panel can affect the operation of the
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If
you have any questions, you may contact
the following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
HI 96819
808-839-2273
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
bile
491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
Guam
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
Black plate (69,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
! Operation
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-43
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (70,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The SRS airbag can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the total load on the front
passenger’s seat monitored by the front
passenger’s occupant detection system
weight sensor. For this reason, only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in
the event of a collision, but this does not
mean failure of the system.
If the front sub sensors and the impact
sensors in the airbag control module
detect a predetermined amount of force
during a frontal collision, the control
module sends signals to the airbag
module(s) (only driver’s module or both
driver’s and front passenger’s modules)
instructing the module(s) to inflate the
SRS frontal airbag(s). The driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags use
dual stage inflators.
The two inflators of each airbag are
triggered either sequentially or simulta-
neously, depending on the severity of
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag and depending o n the
severity of impact and the total load on
the seat in the case of the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag. After deploy-
ment, the SRS airbag immediately starts
to deflate so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed. The time required from detect-
ing impact to the deflation of the SRS
airbag after deployment is shorter than the
blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS
airbag would activate in a non-accident
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag
will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision
and will not interfere with the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will b e relea sed. The se
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steerin g
wheel and dashboard w ith bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. They are not designed to
deploy in most lesser frontal imp acts
because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are not designed to deploy in most side or
rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents
because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passen-
ger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
Black plate (71,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Example of accident in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most
likely deploy
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger ’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the co llision described
above.
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which it is possible that the
driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-
ploy
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (72,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
Black plate (73,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the driver’s/driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) is/are not designed to
deploy in most cases
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are not designed to deploy
in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
be activated on the second impact.
& SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin i s stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
located at the top of each center pillar.
Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the
occupant and the side window and sup-
plement the seatbelt by reducing the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (74,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
impact to the occupant’s head.
WARNING
The SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are designed as only
a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt. They
do not do away with the need to
fasten seatbelts. It is also important
to wear your seatbelt to help avoid
injuries that can result when an
occupant is not seated in a proper
upright position.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
door, and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of
a side impact collision. However,
theforceofSRSsideairbag
deployment may cause injuries
if your head or other parts of the
body are too close to the SRS
side airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms or hands out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbag on each
side of the cabin is stored in the
roof side (between the front pillar
and a point over the rear seat),
and it provides protection by
deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event
of a side impact or a rollover.
However, the force of its deploy-
ment may cause injuries if your
head is too close to it.
WARNING
Do not rest your arm on either front
door or its internal trim. It could be
injured in the event of SRS side
airbag deployment.
Black plate (75,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or wrap his/her
arms around the front seat seat-
back. In the event of an accident,
the force of the SRS side airbag
deployment could injure the child
seriously because his/her head
or arms or other parts of the
body are too close to the SRS
side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
aged 12 and under should be
placed in the rear seat anyway
and should be properly re-
strained at all times.
. Never allow a child to kneel on
any passenger’s seat facing the
side window or put their head,
arms or hands out of the window.
In the event of an accident, the
force of the SRS curtain airbag
deployment could injure the child
seriously because his/her head is
close to the SRS curtain airbag.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of t he SRS side airbag
deployment, they could be pro-
pelled dangerously toward the
vehicle’s occupants and cause
injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (76,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
A hands-free microphone o r
other accessory in such a loca-
tion could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
. Never hang or place coat hangers
or other hard or pointed objects
near the side windows. If such
items are present when the SRS
curtain airbags deploy, they
could be thrown through the
passenger compartment and
cause serious injuries. They
could also prevent proper opera-
tion of the SRS curtain airbags.
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback and do not attach
labels or stickers to the front seat
surface on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag,
reducing protection available to the
front seat’s occupant.
! Operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
side airbags and SRS curt ain airbags
deploy independently of each other since
each has its own impact sensor. There-
fore, they may not both deploy in the same
accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag deploys independently
of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags in the steering wheel and
instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact
force, is located in each of the left and
right center pillars and rear wheel houses.
Another impact sensor, which also senses
impact force, is located under the rear
center seat. In addition, a rollover sensor
is located inside the airbag control mod-
ule.
If one of the center pillar impact sensors
and the impact sensor that is located
under the rear center seat together sense
an impact force above a predetermined
level in a side impact collision, the control
module causes both the SRS side airbag
and curtain airbag on the impacted side to
inflate regardless of whether the rear
wheel house impact sensor on the same
side senses an impact.
If one of the rear wheel house impact
sensors and the impact sensor that is
located under the rear center seat to-
gether sense an impact force above a
predetermined level in a side impact
collision, the control module causes only
Black plate (77,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted
side to inflate.
If the rollover sensor detects rollover of the
vehicle, the control module inflates the
curtain airbags.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye. The SRS curtain airbags remain
inflated for a while following deployment
then slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbags deploy even when no one occu-
pies the seat on the side on which an
impact is applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbags deploy, a sudden, fairly
loud inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be relea sed. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag
system (from the front pillar to the
part of the roof side over the rear
seat). Doing so can cause burns
because the components ca n be
very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbags are designed to deploy in the
event of an accident involving a moderate
to severe side impact collision. Also, in the
case of a rollover, the SRS curtain airbags
deploy. They are not designed to deploy in
most lesser side impacts. Also, they are
not designed to deploy in most frontal or
most rear impacts because SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-
ment would not help the occupant in those
situations.
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbags are designed to function on a one-
time-only basis.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
ment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself. Also, the SRS curtain airbags
deploy depending on the vehicle’s position
and inclination at the time of the rollover.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS side airbag will most
likely deploy
A severe side impact near the front seat
activates the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (78,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most
likely deploy
1) A severe side impact near the front seat
or the rear seat activates the SRS curtain
airbag.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) If the angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a
curbstone laterally.
Black plate (79,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (80,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to
deploy
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
Black plate (81,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely
to deploy
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (82,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag are not designed
to deploy in most cases
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in most
cases if the vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision or is struck from behind. Exam-
ples of such accidents are illustrated.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS curtain airbag is not
designed to deploy in most cases
The SRS curtain airbags are not designed
to deploy in most cases if the vehicle
pitches end over end.
Black plate (83,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& SRS airbag system monitors
Type A
Type B
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
SRS airbag system warning light “AIR-
BAG” will show normal system operation
by lighting for approximately 6 seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator:
. Front sub sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact and rollover sensors)
. Frontal airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Side airbag sensor
– Center pillar right-hand side
– Center pillar left-hand side
. Side airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Curtain airbag sensor
– Rear wheel house right-hand side
– Rear wheel house left-hand side
. Curtain airbag module
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
. Seatbelt pretensioner
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
ger’s side)
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension
sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (84,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no user-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
ing with or disconnecting the
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center console
. On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s s ide and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
damaged in an accident in which either
or both of the frontal airbags did not
deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
. Center pillar, rear wheel house or
rear sub frame, or an area near these
parts, was involved in an accident in
which the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag did not deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which no
SRS airbag deployed.
Black plate (85,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
WARNING
To avoid accidental activation of the
system or rendering the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components
or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
This includes the following modifi-
cations.
. Installat ion of custom steering
wheels
. A ttachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
. Installation of custom seats
. Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
. Installation of additional fabric or
leather on the front seat
. Attachment of a hands-free mi-
crophone or any other accessory
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
rear pillar, the windshield, a side
window, an assist grip, or any
other cabin surface that would be
near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag.
. Installation of additional electri-
cal/electronic equipment such as
a mobile two-way radio on or
near the SRS airbag system
components and/or wiring is not
advisable. This could interfere
with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59
1
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2
Key number plate and security ID plate................ 2-2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-3
Key replacement ................................................. 2-3
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-5
Power door locking switches............................. 2-6
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-7
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-7
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-8
Unlocking the doors............................................ 2-9
Unlocking the rear gate ....................................... 2-9
Illuminated entry ................................................. 2-9
Vehicle finder function......................................... 2-9
Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-10
Selecting turn signal lights operation.................. 2-10
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-10
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-10
Replacing lost transmitters................................. 2-11
Alarm system..................................................... 2-14
System operation............................................... 2-14
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-15
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-15
Arming the system ............................................ 2-15
Disarming the system ........................................ 2-17
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-17
Passive arming.................................................. 2-17
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-18
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-19
Child safety locks .............................................. 2-19
Windows............................................................. 2-20
Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-20
Power window operation by passengers............. 2-22
Initialization of power window (type A) ............... 2-23
Rear gate............................................................ 2-23
Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-24
To open the moonroof ....................................... 2-25
To close the moonroof ....................................... 2-25
Anti-entrapment function.................................... 2-25
Sun shade ......................................................... 2-26
Keys and doors
2
Black plate (90,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys
1) Master key (black)
2) Submaster key (black)
3) Valet key (gray)
4) Key number plate
5) Security ID plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle:
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and driver ’s door lock. You can keep the
glove box locked when you leave your
vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
& Key number plate and secur-
ity ID plate
1) Key number plate
2) Security ID plate
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set. The
security ID for the immobilizer system is
stamped on the security ID plate attached
to the key set. Be sure to keep these
plates in a safe place, not in the vehicle. It
is recommended to make a note of these
numbers to be on the safe side. These
numbers are needed to make a replace-
ment key if you lose your key or lock it
inside the vehicle.
For information on making replacement
keys, refer to “Key replacement” F2-3.
The security ID is also needed for
replacement or repair of the engine control
unit, integrated unit, or combination meter.
Black plate (91,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Immobilizer
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unau thorized person f rom
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if
an unregistered key fits into the ignition
switch and can be turned to the “START”
position, the engine will not start or will
stop after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a trans-
ponder in which the key’s ID code is
stored. When a key is inserted into the
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
position, the transponder transmits the
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
matches the ID code registered in the
immobilizer system, the system allows the
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
transmitted and acted upon almost in-
stantly, the immobilizer system does not
impede normal starting of the engine.
If the engine fails to start, pull out the key
once before trying again. Refer to “Ignition
switch” F3-3.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of I C
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
NOTE
To protect your vehi cle from th eft,
please pay close attention to the fol-
lowing security precautions.
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
with its keys inside.
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
windows and the moonroof, and lock
the doors and rear gate.
. Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
& Security indicator light
Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-23.
& Key replacement
Your key number plate and security ID
plate are required if you need a new
replacement key. Any new key must be
registered to your vehicle’s immobilizer
system. Up to four keys can be registered
for use with one vehicle.
For security, all the keys must be re-
registered to your vehicle’s immobilizer
system wh en registeri ng a new key.
Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
be presented when a new key is regis-
tered. Any key that is not re-registered
cannot be used after the other keys are re-
registered. For information on replace-
ment keys and on the registration of keys
with your immobilizer system, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
A vehicle that is equipped with the
remote engine start system as a dealer
Keys and doors 2-3
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (92,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-4 Keys and doors
option can register up to three keys for
use with one vehicle.
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key and open the door while the alarm
system is armed, the alarm system is
triggered and the vehicle’shorn
sounds. In this case, perform any of
the following operations:
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter.
. Insert the key i nto the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” F2-14.
To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with the key, turn the key toward the rear.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
front.
Pull the outside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Black plate (93,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without
the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and
then close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the
power door locking switch, push the front
side of the switch (“LOCK ” side) and then
close the door. In this case, all closed
doors and the rear gate are locked at the
same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever rearward. To unlock the door
from the inside , rotate the lock lever
forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are closed before starting to
drive.
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-
belts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is acciden-
tally opened, and intruders from
unexpectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle.
& Battery drainage prevention
function
If a door or the rear gate is not completely
closed, the interior lights will remain
illuminated as a result. However, several
lights are automatically turned off by the
battery drainage prevention function to
prevent the battery from discharging. The
following interior lights are affected by this
function.
Keys and doors 2-5
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (94,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-6 Keys and doors
Item
Switch
position
Automatically turning
off
Map lights OFF
*1
Approximately 20
minutes later
Dome light DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
—
Approximately 20
minutes later
Door step
lights
— None
*2
Cargo area
light
DOOR
None
*2
*1: The map lights can be controlled by the
battery drainage prevention function only when
the map light switches are in the OFF position
and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR
position. For the switch positions, refer to “Map
light” F6-3
.
*2: The door step lights and the cargo area light
are not affected by the battery drainage
prevention function, so the lights do not turn
off automatically. To turn off the lights, it is
necessary that each door and the rear gate are
completely closed.
The operational/non-operational setting of
this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer to change the setting.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When lea ving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate while the
key is in the ignition switch.
Power door locking switches
1) Lock
2) Unlock
All doors and the rear gate can be locked
and unlocked by the power door locking
switches located at the driver’s side and
the front passenger’s side doors.
To lock the doors, press the front side of
the switch.
To unlock the doors, press the rear side of
the switch.
If you press the front (lock) side of the
switch and then close the driver’s door, all
the closed doors and the rear gate will be
locked.
Black plate (95,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention func-
tion
When the key is still in the ignition switch,
even if the front side of the power door
locking switch is pressed and then the
driver’s door is closed, the doors will not
be locked to prevent the key from being
locked in the vehicle (Key lock-in preven-
tion function).
In the following cases, however, the key
may be locked in the vehicle. Be sure to
bring the key with you when getting out of
the vehicle.
. If the driver’s door is locked by turning
the lock lever to the rear (“LOCK”) position
and closing the door
. If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door f rom th e outsi de o f the
vehicle
The setting (operational/non-operational)
of this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. C ontact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
NOTE
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
Remote keyless entry system
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans-
mitteronanairplane,donot
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operati on of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
. FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
Keys and doors 2-7
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (96,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-8 Keys and doors
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Two transmitters are provided for your
vehicle.
The keyless entry system has the follow-
ing functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate without a key
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-14.
The operable distance of the keyless entry
system is approximate ly 30 feet (10
meters). However, this distance will vary
depending on environmental conditions.
The system’s operable distance will be
shorter in areas near a facility or electronic
equipment emitting strong radio waves
such as a power plant, broadcast station,
TV tower, or remote controller of home
electronic appliances.
The keyless entry system does not oper-
ate when the key is inserted in the ignition
switch.
: Rear gate unlock button
: Unlock/disarm button
: Lock/arm button
A: Panic button
1) Front
2) Back
& Locking the doors
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and
the rear gate. An electronic chirp will
sound once and the turn signal lights will
flash once.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound
five times and the turn signal lights will
flash five times to alert you that the doors
or the rear gate are not properly closed.
When you close the door, it will automa-
tically lock and then an electronic chirp will
sound once and the turn signal lights will
flash once.
Black plate (97,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Unlocking the doors
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
door. An electronic chirp will sound twice
and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
To unlock all doors and the rear gate,
briefly press the “
” button a second time
within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the “
” button (for
unlocking of all of the doors and the
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
tem may not respond.
& Unlocking the rear gate
Pressing the “ ” button unlocks the rear
gate.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the turn signal lights will flash twice.
& Illuminated entry
The interior (dome) light and the map light
will illuminate when the “
” button is
pressed. These lights stay illuminated for
approximately 30 seconds if any of the
doors or the rear gate is not opened.
If the “
” button is pressed before 30
seconds have elapsed, these lights will
turn off. The lights must be set to the
DOOR position in order for this function
to operate.
A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-
nation period setting of the interior light in
accordance with your preference. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
& Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “
”
button three times in a 5-second period
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound
once and its turn signal lights to flash three
times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “
” button
three times, the system may not re-
spond to the signals from the remote
transmitter.
Keys and doors 2-9
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (98,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-10 Keys and doors
& Sounding a panic alarm
A “PANIC” button is located on the back of
the transmitter.
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the turn signal
lights will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
button on the remote is pressed, the alarm
will be deactivated after approximately 30
seconds.
& Selecting turn signal lights
operation
When the remote keyless entry system is
used, the turn signal lights flash. However,
the turn signal lights flashing operational/
non-operational setting can be changed
by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
& Selecting audible signal op-
eration
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off.
Do the following to deactivate the audible
signal. You can also use the same steps
to restore the function.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the
power door locking switch.
3. While holding down the “UNLOCK”
side of the power door locking switch, pull
the key out and re-insert it into the ignition
switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds
after step 2.
4. Open and close the driver’s door once
within 10 seconds after step 3.
5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to
indicate completion of the setting.
You may have the above settings done by
your SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
& Replacing the battery
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when repla-
cing the battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the trans-
mitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
When the transmitter battery begins to get
weak, transmitte r range will begin to
decrease. Replace the battery as soon
as possible.
Black plate (99,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
To replace the battery:
1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to
open the transmitter case.
2. Remove the old battery from the
holder.
1) Negative (−) side facing up
3. Replace with a new battery (type
CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to
install the new battery with the negative
(−) side facing up.
4. Refit the removed half of the transmit-
ter case.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
keyless entry system’s control unit.
Press either the “
” or “ ” button six
times to synchronize the unit.
& Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should re-
program all of your transmitters for secur-
ity reasons. It is recommended that you
have your dealer program all of your
transmitters into your system.
! Programming the transmitters
The keyless entry system is equipped with
a special code learning feature that allows
you to program new transmitter codes into
the system or to delete old ones. The
system can learn up to four unique
transmitter codes. The four transmitter
codes may be the same or different.
Programming transmitter codes into
system:
Bag containing transmitter
Keys and doors
2-11
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (100,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-12 Keys and doors
Transmitter circuit board
To register a new transmitter with the
keyless entry system, it is necessary to
program the transmitter’s code (identifica-
tion number) into the system. A label
showing the code is affixed to the bag
containing the transmitter, and another is
affixed to the circuit board inside the
transmitter. If there is no bag, open the
transmitter case and make a note of the
eight-digit number. Program the number
into the system in accordance with the
following procedure:
1. Firmly close the doors and the rear
gate.
2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the
driver’s seat, and close the door.
3. Perform the following steps within 45
seconds.
(1) Open and close the driver’s door
once.
1) ON
2) LOCK
(2) Insert the key into the ignition
switch, then turn it from the “LOCK”
position to the “ON” position 10 times
within 15 seconds.
NOTE
. When you complete step (2), an
electronic tone will sound once.
. If you do not perform steps (1) and
(2) within 45 seconds, an error will
occur. Neither an electronic tone nor
the buzzer will sound, and the interior
lamp will not flash. In this event, per-
form the whole procedure again begin-
ning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within
15 seconds.
NOTE
. When part 4 of the procedure is
completed, an electronic tone will
sound for 30 seconds.
. If you do not perform the operations
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error
will occur and the electronic tone will
not sound. In this event, perform the
registration steps again beginning with
part 3 of the procedure.
Black plate (101,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, push the lock side of the power
door lock switch the same number of
times as the leftmost digit of the transmit-
ter code. For example, push the lock
switch eight times if the leftmost digit of
the code is 8.
NOTE
. The electronic tone will stop sound-
ing when you start entering the num-
ber.
. If you do not start entering the
number using the lock switch before
the electronic tone stops sounding, an
error will occur. In this event, perform
the registration steps again beginning
with part 3 of the procedure.
. If the interval between one push of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
6. When you have finished entering the
number, push the unlock side of the lock
switch within 5 seconds.
NOTE
. An electronic tone will sound.
. If you push the unlock side of the
lock switch when more than 5 seconds
have passed, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure
for each of the remaining digits of the
transmitter code beginning with the sec-
ond digit (counting from the left) and
finishing with the eighth digit.
NOTE
. When you finish entering the eighth
digit, an electronic tone will sound for
30 seconds.
. If the interval between one push of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
8. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, use the power door lock switch
to reenter the transmitter code beginning
with the leftmost digit.
NOTE
If you do not start entering the number
using the lock switch before the elec-
tronic tone stops sounding, an error
will occur. In this event, perform the
procedure again beginning with part 3.
9. When you have finished entering the
code a second time, an electronic tone will
sound for 1 second and automatic door
locking and unlocking operation will take
Keys and doors 2-13
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (102,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-14 Keys and doors
place once to indicate completion of
registration, provided the code entered
the second time is identical to that entered
the first time.
NOTE
If the code entered the second time is
not identical to the code entered the
first time, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 5. If an error occurs
five times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
10. If you wish to program another trans-
mitter code into the system (up to four
transmitter codes can be programmed into
the system), perform the procedure begin-
ning with part 4. When you have finished
programming all of the necessary trans-
mitter codes into the system, remove the
key from the ignition switch.
11. Test every registered transmitter to
confirm correct operation.
! Deleting old transmitter codes
The control unit of the keyless entry
system has four memory locations to store
transmitter codes, giving it the ability to
operate with up to four transmitters. When
you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit-
ter’s code remains in the memory. For
security reasons, lost transmitter codes
should be deleted from the memory.
To delete old transmitter codes, program
four transmitter codes into the system. If
you have only one current transmitter,
program it four times. If you have two
current transmitters, program each one
twice. If you have three current transmit-
ters, program two of them once and the
third one twice. This process will leave
only curr ent transmitter codes in t he
system’s memory.
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating
their keyless entry system within range
of your vehicl e when programming
transmitters. If someone else were to
operate their remote transmitter while
you are programming your transmit-
ters, it is possible that their transmitter
code will be programmed into your
system, allowing them unauthorized
access to your vehicle.
Alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the turn signal lights flash if
someone attempts to b reak into your
vehicle.
The system can be armed and disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system does not operate when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
& System operation
The alarm system will give the following
alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The turn signal lights will flash for 30
seconds.
If any of the doors or the rear gate remains
open after the 30-second period, the horn
will continue to sound for a maximum of 3
minutes. If the door or the rear gate is
closed while the horn is sounding, the
horn will stop sounding with a delay of up
Black plate (103,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
to 30 seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
. Opening any of the doors or the rear
gate
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only vehicles with shock
sensors (dealer option))
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the following interior
lights.
. Dome light (illuminates only when
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
. Map lights (illuminate only when the
door interlock switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
The notifications regarding the dome
light and the map lights are deactivated
as the fac tory setting. A SUBARU
dealer can activate the system. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Activating and deactivating
the alarm system
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the system” F2-17.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the
driver’s power door locking switch, open
the driver’s door within the following 1
second, and wait 10 seconds without
releasing the switch. The setting will then
be changed as follows.
If the system was previously activated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
“AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,
indicating that the system is now deacti-
vated.
If the system was previously deacti-
vated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
“AL on” and the horn sounds once,
indicating that the system is now acti-
vated.
NOTE
You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If you have accidentally trig-
gered the alarm system
! To stop the alarm
Do any of the following operations:
. Press any button on the remote trans-
mitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
& Arming the system
! To arm the system using remote
transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate.
Keys and doors 2-15
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (104,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-16 Keys and doors
: Press to Arm the system.
: Press to Disarm the system.
Type A
Type B
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less
than 2 seconds). All doors and the rear
gate will lock, an electronic chirp will
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
once, and the security indicator light will
start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing
for 30 seconds (standby time), the security
indicator light will then flash slowly (twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
ing that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the turn signal lights flash five
times to alert you that the doors or the rear
gate are not properly closed. When you
close the door, the system will automati-
cally arm and the doors will be automati-
cally locked.
! To arm the system using power
door locking switches
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close the doors and the rear gate but
leave only the driver’s door or the front
passenger’s door open.
6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of
the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
Black plate (105,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
once and the indicator lights will start
flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standb y time), the indicator
lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-
mately every 2 seconds), indicating that
the system has been armed for surveil-
lance.
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
engine hood, the windows and/or
moonroof (if equipped) are open. Al-
ways make sure that they are fully
closed before arming the system.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
formed by your SUBARU dealer.
. The system is in the standby mode
for a 30-second period after locking the
doors with the remote transmitter. The
security indicator light will flash at
short intervals during this period.
. If any of the following actions are
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveil-
lance state.
– Doors are unlocked using the
remote transmitter.
– Any door (including the rear
gate) is opened.
– Ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
& Disarming the system
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than
2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic
chirp will sound twice, the turn signal
lights will flash twice. The flashing of the
security indicator light will then change
slowly (once approximately every 3 sec-
onds from twice approximately every 2
seconds), indicating that the alarm system
has been disarmed.
NOTE
After disarming the alarm system,
briefly press the “
” button a second
time within 5 seconds to unlock all
other doors and the rear gate.
! Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the
transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too
weak), you can disarm the system without
using the transmitter as follows.
. Turn the ignition switch from the
“LOCK” to the “ON” position with a
registered key.
& Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
for locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate and panic activation.
To ent er the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating
and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
15. The security indicator light will con-
tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
indicating that the system is in the valet
mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
ing the alarm system” F2-15.
& Passive arming
When passive arming mode has been
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
system is automatically accomplished
without using the remote transmitter. Note
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
MANUALLY LOCKED.
! To enter the passive mode
If you wish to program the passive arming
mode, have it done by your SUBARU
dealer.
Keys and doors 2-17
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (106,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-18 Keys and doors
! Arming the system
CAUTION
In passive mode, the system will
automatically activate the alarm but
WILL NOT automatica lly lock the
doors. In order to lock the doors
you must either lock them as in-
dicated in step 4 below or with the
key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually
will result in a higher security risk.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
1) ON
2) LOCK
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
with the inside door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The syst em will
automatically arm after 1 minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also
be armed with the remote transmitter or
with the power door locking switches. If
the remote transmitter or power door
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
arming will take place immediately regard-
less of whether or not the passive mode
has been selected.
! Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the
“
” button on the transmitter.
& Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indicator light will light
for 1 second and then flash as follows.
. When a door or rear gate was opened:
5 times
. When the ignition switch was turned to
the “ON” position: 3 times
. When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only vehicles
with shock sensors (dealer option))
. When a light impact was sensed: once
(only vehicles with shock sensors (dealer
option))
NOTE
Any of the above indicator light flash-
ings will recur each time the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Rearming the alarm system cancels the
flashing.
Black plate (107,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Shock sensors (dealer op-
tion)
The shock sensors trigger the alarm
system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their
electric wires are cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the turn
signal lights to flash for a short time when
the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of
a strong impact or multiple impacts by
sounding the horn and flashing the turn
signal lights, both lasting approximately 30
seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by break-
ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the gl ass us ing a res cue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vi-
bration as indicated in the following
examples and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system
and shock sensors appropriately de-
pending on where you usually park
your vehicle.
Examples:
Vibration from a construction site
Vibration in a multistory car park
Vibration from trains
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
ference by your SUBARU dealer.
Child safety locks
Each rear door has a child safety lock that
prevents the door from being opened even
if the inside door handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
lock position, the door cannot be opened
from inside regardless of the position of
the inner door handle lock lever. The door
can only be opened from the outside.
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury or
death could result if a child acciden-
tally opens the door and falls out.
Keys and doors 2-19
2
Black plate (108,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-20 Keys and doors
Windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always obey
the following instructions without
exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck or head from being caught
in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the power window.
The power windows operate only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Power window operation by
driver
! Driver’s side power window
switches
1) Lock switch
2) For driver’s window
3) For front passenger’s window
4) For rear left window
5) For rear right window
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
! Operating the driver’s window (type
A)
1) Automatically open/close
2) Open/close
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down function that allows the window to
be opened fully without holding the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.
Black plate (109,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto up
function that allows the window to be
closed fully without holding the switch.
Pull the switch up until it clicks and release
it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window halfway, press the switch
down lightly.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery or
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto
up/down function is deactivated. Initi-
alize the power window to reactivate
the one-touch auto up/down function.
Refer to “Initialization of power window
(type A)” F2-23.
! Operating the driver ’s window
(type B)
1) Open
2) Automatically open
3) Close
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down function that allows the window to
be opened fully without holding the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
! Anti-entrapment function (type A)
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test this func-
tion using fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if an
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact simi-
lar to that caused by trapping an object
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
over a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
ment function may operate.
. The window cannot be operated for
a few seconds after the anti-entrap-
ment function operates.
. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected due to situations such as
battery or fuse replacement, the anti-
entrapment function is deactivated.
Initialize the power window to reacti-
vate the anti-entrapment function. Re-
Keys and doors 2-21
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (110,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-22 Keys and doors
fer to “Initialization of power window
(type A)” F2-23.
While closing automatically, if the window
senses a substantial enough object
trapped between the window and the
window frame, it automatically moves
down slightly and stops.
! Operating the passengers’ win-
dows
To open:
Push the appropriate switch down and
hold it un til the wi ndow rea ches the
desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
! Locking the passengers’ windows
1) Lock
2) Unlock
Push the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the “LOCK” position , the
passengers’ windows cannot be opened
or closed.
Push the switch again to cancel the
passengers’ window locking.
& Power window operation by
passengers
Each passenger window can be controlled
by the power window switch located on
the door.
To open:
Push the switch down and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
driver ’s side door, is in the “LOCK”
position, the passengers’ windows cannot
be operated with the passengers’
switches.
Black plate (111,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Initialization of power win-
dow (type A)
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function
Initialize the power window using the
following procedure to reactivate these
functions.
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
by pus hing down the power window
switch.
4. Pull up the power window switch and
close the window completely. Continue
pulling up the switch for approximately 1
second after the window is closed com-
pletely.
Rear gate
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Power door locking switches ” F2-6.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-7.
To open:
Unlock the rear gate and push the rear
gate opener button.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the inside handle.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous ex haust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
Keys and doors 2-23
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (112,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-24 Keys and doors
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the inside
handle. Also avoid closing the
rear gate by pulling the inside
handle from inside the cargo
area. There is a danger of your
hand being caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading car-
go.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
ing system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever. For the
procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the
rear gate cannot be opened” F9-18.
Moonroof (if equipped)
WARNING
Never let anyone’shands,arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the
vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always obey
the following instructions without
exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the moonroof.
Black plate (113,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
. Never try to check the anti-en-
trapment function using fingers,
hands or other parts of your
body.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
1) Open/close switch
2) Open
3) Close
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& To open the moonroof
Pull the switch to the “OPEN” side then
quickly release it. The sun shade will also
be opened together with the moonroof.
The moonroof will stop at a position 20 in
(50 cm ) away from th e fully closed
position. Pull the switch again to open
the moonroof completely.
To stop the moonroof at a desired position,
momentarily push the switch to the
“CLOSE” or “OPEN” side.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
. For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
. Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to be
generated at high speeds. If this oc-
curs, use the moonroof at the initial
stop position of 20 in (50 cm) away
from the fully closed position.
& To close the moonroof
Push the switch to the “CLOSE” side then
quickly release it. The moonroof will stop
at a position 8 in (20 cm) away from the
fully closed position. Push the switch
again to close the moonroof completely.
To stop the moonroof at a desired position,
momentarily push the switch to the
“CLOSE” or “OPEN” side.
& Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back by 6 in (15 cm)
from that point and then stops. The anti-
entrapment function may also be activated
by a strong shock on the moonroof even
when there is nothing trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
Keys and doors 2-25
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (114,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2-26 Keys and doors
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3
Acc ..................................................................... 3-4
ON ...................................................................... 3-4
START ................................................................ 3-4
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5
Ignition switch light............................................. 3-5
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-6
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-6
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement upon turning on the ignition
switch............................................................... 3-6
Meter needles/gauge illumination setting (models
with type A combination meter) ......................... 3-7
Speedometer....................................................... 3-8
Odometer/Trip meter............................................ 3-8
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-10
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-10
Temperature gauge (models with type A
combination meter) .......................................... 3-11
ECO gauge (models with type A combination
meter) .............................................................. 3-11
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-12
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-13
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-14
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators......................................................... 3-15
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator light................................................... 3-15
Coolant temperature low indicator light (if
equipped)/Coolant temperature high warning
light (if equipped)............................................. 3-16
Charge warning light.......................................... 3-17
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-17
AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT models).............. 3-17
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
models) ........................................................... 3-18
ABS warning light.............................................. 3-19
Brake system warning light................................ 3-20
Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-21
Hill start assist warning light (MT models) .......... 3-21
Door open warning light .................................... 3-21
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT models) .......... 3-21
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light
(models with HID headlights)............................ 3-21
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-22
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-23
Security indicator light....................................... 3-23
SPORT mode indicator light (AT models)............ 3-24
Select lever and gear position indicator (AT
models) ........................................................... 3-24
Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-24
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-24
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 3-24
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-25
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped).......... 3-25
Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-25
Clock .................................................................. 3-25
Instruments and controls
3
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Instruments and controls
Information display ............................................ 3-26
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-27
Current fuel consumption (if equipped) ............... 3-27
Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-28
To turn off fuel consumption indicator
display............................................................. 3-28
Light control switch ........................................... 3-29
Headlights.......................................................... 3-29
High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-30
Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-30
Daytime running light system (if equipped) ......... 3-30
Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with
HID headlights) ................................................ 3-31
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-31
Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-31
Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-32
Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-33
Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-34
Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 3-35
Mirrors ................................................................ 3-36
Inside mirror...................................................... 3-36
Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ....... 3-36
Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink
®
(if equipped) .................................................... 3-38
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-43
Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-44
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-46
Horn.................................................................... 3-47
Black plate (119,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Ignition switch
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
“LOCK” while the vehicle is
being driven or towed because
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. In
addition, when the engine is
turned off, it takes a much great-
er effort than usual to steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees or hands while
you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi-
tion, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a
keyholder or to a large bunch of
other keys, centrifugal force may act
on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
in unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
“ON” or “Acc” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed
in this position. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
! Automatic transmission models
Instruments and controls 3-3
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (120,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-4 Instruments and controls
The key can be turned from “Acc” to
“LOCK” only when the select lever is in the
“P” position.
! Manual transmission models
The key can be turned from “Acc” to
“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in
while turning it.
& Acc
In this position the electrical accessories
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
If your registered key fails to start the
engine, pull out the key once (the security
indicator light will blink), and then insert
the key in the ignition switch and turn it to
the “START” position again to try to start
the engine.
NOTE
The engine may not start in the follow-
ing cases:
. The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
. The key is near another key that
Black plate (121,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
key still in the key cylinder, in the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position.
The chime stops under the following
conditions.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position
. When the key is removed from the
ignition switch
. When the driver’s door is closed
& Ignition switch light
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when the driver’s door is opened or
when the driver’s door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for several
tens of seconds and then gradually turns
off under the following conditions.
. When the driver’s door is closed
. When the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
The light turns off immediately under the
following conditions.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position
. When all doors and the rear gate are
locked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works regard-
less of the ignition switch position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
push the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Instruments and controls 3-5
3
Black plate (122,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-6 Instruments and controls
Meters and gauges
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges on
the combination meter. You will find
their indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Combination meter illumina-
tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the
following sequence:
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
needles, gauge needles, odometer and
trip meter back light illuminate.
2. Meters and gauges each show MAX
position.
3. Meters and gauges each show MIN
position.
4. Dials and indicators in meters and
gauges light up.
5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
gins.
& Canceling the function for
meter/gauge needle move-
ment upon turning on the
ignition switch
Type A
Type B
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position.
2. Press the trip knob to show “
”/“ ”
or “
”/“ ” on the odometer/trip meter
display.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob.
Black plate (123,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Type A:
*: “ ” or “ ”, and “ ” or “ ” cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
Type B:
*: “ ” or “ ” cannot be displayed when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
3. To change the current setting, press
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
/ : Activated
/ : Deactivated
NOTE
Your vehicle’s initial movement setting
of the meter/gauge needles has been
set for activation “
”/“ ” at the time
of shipment from the factory.
& Meter needles/gauge illumi-
nation setting (models with
type A combination meter)
When the setting is activated or deacti-
vated, the me ter needl es and gauge
illuminate and turn off as follows.
Activated:
When the driver’s door is opened while
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
position, the needles and gauge illuminate
and turn off after approximately 20 sec-
onds.
When the ignition switch is turned from the
“ON” position to the “LOCK” position, the
illumination turns off gradually.
Deactivated:
The needles and gauge do not illuminate
when the driver’s door is opened while the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.
The illumination turns off immediately
when the ignition switch is turned from
the “ON” position to the “LOCK” position.
NOTE
. Even during the illumination after
the driver’s door is opened, if the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the combination meter will
illuminate as usual.
. If the doors are locked by the remote
keyless entry system during the illumi-
nation after the driver’s door is opened,
the illumination will be turned off.
. Even while the illumination gradu-
ally turns off after the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position, if the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the combination meter illumi-
nates as usual.
To change the setting:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position.
Instruments and controls 3-7
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (124,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-8 Instruments and controls
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or
“
” on the trip meter display. The display
can be switched as shown in the following
sequence by pressing the trip knob.
*: “ ” or “ ”, and “ ” or “ ” cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
3. To change the current setting, press
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
NOTE
The initial illumination setting of the
meter needles/gauge of your vehicle
has been set for activation “
” at the
time of shipment from the factory.
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
& Odometer/Trip meter
Type A
1) Trip knob
Type B
1) Trip knob
Black plate (125,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
This meter displays the odometer and two
trip meters when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch the indications while the
odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do not
press the trip knob within 10 seconds of
illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the
odometer/trip meter will turn off.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequences by pressing the
trip knob.
Type A:
*: “ ” or “ ”, and “ ” or “ ” cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
Type B:
*: “ ” or “ ” cannot be displayed when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
! Odometer
Type A
Type B
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
! Double trip meter
Type A
Instruments and controls
3-9
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (126,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-10 Instruments and controls
Type B
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2
seconds.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to change the func-
tion of the indicator during driving.
Doing so could result in an accident.
NOTE
If the connection between the combina-
tion meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. This may cause severe da-
mage to the engine.
& Fuel gauge
Type A
1) Low fuel warning light (Refer to “Low fuel
warning light” F3-21.)
Type B
1) Low fuel warning light (Refer to “Low fuel
warning light” F3-21.)
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge is off
(type A) or shows “E” (type B) even if the
fuel tank contains fuel.
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the fuel gauge will illuminate and indicate
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge is indicating the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you
Black plate (127,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
(a) do not press the trip knob for 10
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s
door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
& Temperature gauge (models
with type A combination me-
ter)
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary i n
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-
13.
& ECO gauge (models with type
A combination meter)
The unit displayed varies depending on
the model.
The ECO gauge shows the difference
between the average rate of fuel con-
sumption since the trip meter was last
reset and the current rate of fuel con-
Instruments and controls 3-11
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (128,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-12 Instruments and controls
sumption.
The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel
efficiency as shown in the following chart.
Displayed unit
Needle pointing
“+” side “-” side
MPG Better Poorer
l/100km Poorer
Better
NOTE
. The E CO gauge shows only an
approximate indication of fuel e ffi-
ciency.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not
operate.
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate when the ignition switch is
initially turned to the “ON” position. This
permits checking the operation of the
bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and turn off after several sec-
onds or after the engine has started.
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the
seatbelt.)
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the front seat passenger
fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
ON /
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light
: Coolant temperature high warning light
(if equipped)
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
(AT models)
: Low tire pressure warning light
(U.S.- spec. models)
/ : ABS warning light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Low fuel warning light
: Hill start assist warning light
(MT models)
: Door open warning light
: AWD warning light (AT models)
: Automatic headlight beam leveler
warning light (models with HID head-
lights)
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light
Black plate (129,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
: SPORT mode indicator light
(AT models)
: Cruise control indicator light
SET/
: Cruise control set indicator light
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat, as required by current
safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their seat-
belts by illuminating the warning lights in
the locations indicated in the following
illustration and sounding a chime.
Driver’s warning light (type A)
Driver’s warning light (type B)
Front passenger’s warning light
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– At speeds lower than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
Instruments and controls 3-13
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (130,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-14 Instruments and controls
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on
the front passenger’s seat.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the device from
functioning correctly or cause the device
to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their back-
ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For the adjustment procedure of
the manual seats, refer to “Manual seat”
F1-3.
If the seatbelt warning device for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child occu pant, although we
strongly recommend that all children sit
in the rear seat properly restrained.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
& SRS airbag system
warning light
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Black plate (131,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indica-
tors
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the
clock in the center portion of the dash-
board.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
neously even after the system c heck
period, the system is malfunctioning.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately for an inspection.
& CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in-
dicator light
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emission
control system checked and re-
paired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that th ere is a problem or pote ntial
problem somewhere in the emission con-
trol system.
! If the light illuminates steadily
If the light illuminates steadily while driving
or does not turn off after the engine starts,
an emission control system malfunction
has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
Instruments and controls 3-15
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (132,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-16 Instruments and controls
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light coming on
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and make sure nothing is
interfering with the sealing of the cap, then
retighten the cap until it clicks. Tightening
the cap will not make the CHECK EN-
GINE warning light turn off immediately. It
may take several driving trips. If the light
does not turn off, take your vehicle to your
SUBARU dealer immediately.
! If the light is blinking
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should do the
following.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
several driving trips. You should have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Coolant temperature
low indicator light (if
equipped)/Coolant tem-
perature high warning
light (if equipped)
CAUTION
. After turning the ignition switch
to the “ON” position, if this
indicator light/warning light
shows any of the following con-
ditions, the electrical system may
be malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for
an inspection.
– It remains blinking in RED.
– It remains illuminated in RED
for more than 2 seconds.
– It remains blinking in RED and
BLUE alternately.
. While driving, if thi s indicator
light/warning light shows any of
the following conditions, take the
specified appropriate measure
listed below.
– Blinking or illuminated in
RED:
Safely stop the vehicle as
soon as possible, and refer
to the emergency steps for the
engine overheating. After-
ward, have the system
checked by your nearest
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En-
gine overheating” F9-13.
– Blinking in RED and BLUE
alternately:
The electrical system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
This coola nt temperature low indicator
light/c oola nt te mp erat ure hig h wa rnin g
light has the following three functions.
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-
cient warming up of the engine
. Blinking in RED indicates that the
engine is close to overheating
. Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
ing condition of the engine
For the system check, this indicator light/
warning light illuminates in RED for
approximately 2 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
After that, this indicator light/warning light
changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
Black plate (133,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
turns off when the engine is warmed up
sufficiently.
If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases over the specified range, the
indicator light/warning light bli nks in
RED. At this time, the engine is close to
overheating.
If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases further, the indicator light/warning
light illuminates in RED continuously. At
this time, the engine may be overheating.
When the ind icator l ight/warning light
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely
stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
refer t o the emergency steps for the
engine over heating. Refe r to “Engine
overheating” F9-13. Afterward, have the
system checked by your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
Also, if the indicator light/warning light
often blinks in RED, the electrical system
may be malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
If the engine is restarted after a certain
driving condition, this indicator light/
warning light may illuminate in RED.
However, this is not a malfunction if the
indicator light/warning light turns off
after a short time.
& Charge warning light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains on, contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
& Oil pressure warning
light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains on,
contact your nea rest S UBA RU de aler
immediately.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
& AT OIL TEMP warning
light (AT models)
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the automatic
transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Automatic transmission control
system warning
If this light flashes after the engine starts, it
may indicate that the automatic transmis-
sion control system is not working prop-
erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal-
er for service immediately.
Instruments and controls 3-17
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (134,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-18 Instruments and controls
& Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S.-spec.
models)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note t hat the TPMS is not a
subst itute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver ’s responsibi lity to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain contin uously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfun ction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wh eels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Should the warning light illuminate stea-
dily after blinking for approximately one
minute, have the system inspected by
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
. If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for ap-
proximately one minute, you
should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. If this light illuminates while driv-
ing, never brake suddenly and
keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed. Then
slowly pull off the road to a safe
place. Otherwise an accident in-
volving serious vehicle damage
and serious personal injury
could occur.
. If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
Black plate (135,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is un-
able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
CAUTION
. The tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure.
The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least
monthly) using a tire gauge.
. After any change to tire pressure
(s), the tire pressure monitoring
system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehi-
cle is first driven more than 20
mph (32 km/h). After adjusting
the tire pressures, increase the
vehicle speed to at least 20 mph
(32 km/h) to start the TPMS re-
checking of the tire inflation
pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning lig ht sho uld
turn off a few minutes later.
Therefore, be sure to install the
specified size for the front and
rear tires.
& ABS warning light
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by
your SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
when the vehicle speed ex-
ceeds approximately 8 mph
(12 km/h).
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is
off), the ABS function shuts
down. However, the conventional
brake system continues to oper-
ate normally.
The ABS warning light illuminates to-
gether with the brake system warning light
if the EBD system malfunctions. For
further details of the EBD system mal-
function warning, refer to “Brake system
warning light” F3-20.
NOTE
If the warning light behaves as follows,
the ABS system may be considered
normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains on after
the engine has been started, but it
turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 8 mph (12
Instruments and controls 3-19
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (136,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-20 Instruments and controls
km/h).
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfu nction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
& Brake system
warning light
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains i lluminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
This light has the following functions.
! Parking brake warning
The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
parking brake is fully released.
! Brake fluid level warning
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the “MIN” mark in the
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
cle’s motion may therefore become some-
what harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, apply th e
parking brake and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Dri ve carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
Black plate (137,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty (approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal [10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp
gal]). It only operates when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US
gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
& Hill start assist warning
light (MT models)
While the engine is running, if any
malfunction is detected in the Hill start
assist system, the light will illuminate.
WARNING
When the Hill start assist warning
light illuminates, have the vehicle
inspected at an authorized SUBARU
dealer.
& Door open warning
light
The door open warning light illuminates if
any door or the rear gate is not fully
closed.
Always make sure this light is out before
you start to drive.
& All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light (AT models)
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of different diameters fitted on
the wheels or with excessively low air
pressure in any of the tires.
CAUTION
Continuing to drive with the AWD
warning light flashing can damage
the powertrain. If the AWD warning
light starts to flash, promptly park in
a safe place and check whether the
tires have differing diameters and
whether any of the tires has an
excessively low inflation pressure.
& Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (models with HID
headlights)
This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, have your vehicle inspected at
your SUBARU dealer.
Instruments and controls 3-21
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (138,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-22 Instruments and controls
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol operation indicator
light
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS
is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
also becomes inoperative, causing
the warning light to illuminate.
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control and ABS systems are inop-
erative in this case, the ordinary
functions of the brake system are
still available. You will be safe while
driving with this condition, but drive
carefully and have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, only this particular warning
light illuminates. Under these circum-
stances, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) remains fully operational.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered to be operating
normally.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
The indicator light flashes during activa-
tion of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the traction control
function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
Black plate (139,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator
light
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position.
& Security indicator light
Type A
Type B
The security indicator light deters potential
thieves by indicating that the vehicle is
equipped with the security alarm system
and the immobilizer system.
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system ” F2-
14.
! Immobilizer system
This light blinks approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned from
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position or immediately after the key is
pulled out. Refer to “Immobilizer” F2-3.
If the indicator light does not flash, it may
indicate that immobilizer system may be
malfunctionin g. Con tact you r neare st
SUBARU dealer immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illumi-
nates.
NOTE
Even if the security indicator light
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
(the light does not flash if its fuse is
blown), the immobilizer system will
Instruments and controls 3-23
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (140,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-24 Instruments and controls
function normally.
& SPORT mode indicator
light (AT models)
When the select lever is moved to the
manual gate, the SPORT mode is se-
lected and the indicator light illuminates.
Refer to “SPORT mode” F7-20.
& Select lever and gear posi-
tion indicator (AT models)
Type A
Type B
This indicator shows the position of the
select lever.
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator (which shows the
current gear selection) and the upshift/
downshift indicator light up. Refer to
“Automatic transmission” F7-15.
& Turn signal indicator
lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, any of the turn signal light bulbs
may be burned out. Replace the bulb as
soon as possible. Refer to “Replacing
bulbs” F11-45.
& High beam indicator
light
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
& Cruise control indica-
tor light
This light illuminates when the “CRUISE”
main switch is pressed to activate the
cruise control function. For details, refer to
“To set cruise control” F7-32.
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator ligh t illumi-
nates, the cruise control indicator
light flashes at the same time. At
this time, avoid driving at high
speed and ha ve your vehicle in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE
If you press the “CRUISE” main switch
button while turning the ignition switch
“ON”, the cruise control function is
deactivated and the cruise cont rol
Black plate (141,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
indicator light flashes. To reactivate the
cruise control function, turn the igni-
tion switch back to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position, and then turn it again
to the “ON” position.
& Cruise control set in-
dicator light
This light illuminates when vehicle cruising
speed has been set.
& Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
This indicator light is on while the front fog
lights are on.
& Headlight indicator
light
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlight switch is placed in the “
” or
“
” position.
Clock
The clock shows t he time while the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
The time changes by 1 minute each time
the “+” button or “−” button is pressed.
Pressing the “+” button moves the dis-
played time forward, while pressing the “−”
button moves the displayed time back.
Pressing and holding either button
changes the displayed time continuously.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
set the time while driving, as an
accident from inadequate attention
to the road could result.
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, the time
will be erased. After reconnecting the
battery, set the correct time.
Instruments and controls 3-25
3
Black plate (142,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-26 Instruments and controls
Information display
1) Outside temperature indicator
2) Fuel consumption indicator
With the ignition switch in the “ ON”
position, the outside temperature indicator
and fuel consumption indicator appear on
the display.
For type A combination meter:
1) Information display switching knob
Withtheignitionswitchinthe“ON”
position, each press of the information
display switching knob toggles the display
in the following sequence.
For type B combination meter:
The fuel consumption indicator is linked
with the odometer/trip meter display on the
combination meter, according to the fol-
lowing chart.
Odometer/
Trip meter
Fuel consumption indicator
A trip meter Average fuel consumption
corresponding to the A trip
meter
B trip meter Average fuel consumption
corresponding to the B trip
meter
Odometer U.S-spec. models:
Not indicated
Other models:
Current fuel consumption
Black plate (143,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Outside temperature indica-
tor
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
The outside temperature indicator shows
the outside temperature in a range from
−22 to 1228F(−30 to 508C).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; whil e running a t low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shut-
down.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
! Road surface freeze warning indi-
cation
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to
378F(38C) or lower, the temperature
indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
If the display has already indicated an
outside tempe ratur e of 3 78F(38C) or
lower, the indication does not flash even
when the outside temperature drops to
378F(38C) or lower again, unless the
outside temperature has once increased
to 418F(58C) or higher.
If the outside temperature drops to 378F
(38C) or lower while the display is giving
an indication other than the outside
temperature, the display switches to the
outside temperature indication and flashes
for 5 second s befor e ret urnin g to i ts
original indication.
NOTE
The outsi de te mperature i ndication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
& Current fuel consumption (if
equipped)
This display shows the rate of fuel con-
sumption at the present moment.
Instruments and controls 3-27
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (144,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-28 Instruments and controls
NOTE
The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
actual values and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
& Average fuel consumption
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
This display shows the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
When either of the trip meter displays is
reset, the corresponding aver age fuel
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values m ay differ slightly from the
actual values and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
. After e ither trip meter display is
reset, the average fuel consumption
corresponding to that trip meter dis-
play is not shown until the vehicle has
subsequently covered a distance of 1
mile (or 1 km).
& To turn off fuel consumption
indicator display
The fuel consumption indicator display
can be turned off.
To turn off this display, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position and press
the “+” button adjacent to the information
display for approximately 5 seconds. The
information display and the clock display
will blink for 3 seconds and then the fuel
consumption display will turn off.
To restore the indicator, once again press
the “+” button for approximately 5 sec-
onds.
NOTE
. The initial display setting of the fuel
consumption indicator of your vehicle
has been set to operational at the time
of shipment from the factory.
. The average fu el consumpti on is
calculated even while the indicator is
not displayed.
. Even if you turn off the fuel con-
sumption indicator, the fuel consump-
tion indicator will automatically turn on
when the battery voltage is stopped
and then reapplied due to battery
replacement or fuse replacement.
Black plate (145,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Light control switch
The light control switch operates when the
ignition key is inserted into the ignition
switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the ignition key is
removed from the ignition switch.
NOTE
Even if the key is removed from the
ignition switch, the lights can be illu-
minated by once setting the light con-
trol switch to the “OFF” position and
then to the “
” or “ ” position. In
this case, if the driver’s door is opened,
the chirp sound will inform the driver
that the lights are illuminated.
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the “OFF” position. If
the vehicle is left unattended for
a long time with the light control
switch set to a position other
than “OFF”, the battery may be
discharged.
& Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
“
” position
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights, tail
lights and license plate lights are on.
“
” position
Instrument panel il lumination, pa rking
lights, front side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are on.
Instruments and controls 3-29
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (146,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-30 Instruments and controls
& High/low beam change (dim-
mer)
To change from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light “
” on the combina-
tion meter also illuminates.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the center position.
& Headlight flasher
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you. The high beam will remain
on as long as you hold the lever. The
headlight flasher works even though the
light switch is in the “OFF” position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
& Daytime running light system
(if equipped)
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “
” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automati-
cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions:
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position (AT models).
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “
”
position.
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the front side marker lights,
tail lights and license plate lights are
also illuminated.
Black plate (147,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Automatic headlight beam
leveler (models with HID
headlights)
The HID headlights generate more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience too much glare if your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load.
The automati c headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height auto-
matically and optimally according to the
load being carried by the vehicle.
The automatic headlight beam leveler has
a warning light on the combination meter.
Refer to “Automatic headlight beam leve-
ler warning light (models with HID head-
lights)” F3-21.
Turn signal lever
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
Illumination brightness con-
trol
The brightness of clock display, audio, air
conditioner, information display and instru-
ment panel illumination dims automatically
when the light switch is in the “
” or
“
” position.
In addition, you can adjust brightness of
the instrument panel illumination for better
visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
NOTE
When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the il luminati on brightne ss
becomes the maximum and the auto-
Instruments and controls 3-31
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (148,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-32 Instruments and controls
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
Front fog light switch (if
equipped)
The front fog lights operate only when the
low beam headlights are illuminated.
However, the front fog lights turn off when
the headlights are switched to high beam.
To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front
fog light switch on the turn signal lever
upward to the “
” position. To turn off the
front fog lights, turn the switch back down
to the “OFF” position.
Type A
Type B
The indicator light located on the combi-
nation meter will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
Black plate (149,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
onds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades and
cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wipers
on a dry windshield or rear
window, always use the wind-
shield washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wipers
with the blades f rozen to the
window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also the wiper mo-
tor to burn out. If the wiper
blades are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper dei-
cer (if equipped) or rear window
defogger before turning on the
wiper.
. If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, the
wiper motor could burn out even
if the wiper switch is turned off. If
this occurs, promptly stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and clean the window
glass to allow proper wiper op-
eration.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to “Windshield washer
fluid” F11-37.
Also, when driving the vehicle in
freezing temperature, use non-
freezing type wiper blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The wipers operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”
position.
. The front wiper motor is protected
against overload by a circuit breaker. If
the motor operates continuously under
an unusually heavy load, the circuit
breaker may trip to stop the motor
temporarily. If this happens, park your
vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield
Instruments and controls 3-33
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (150,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-34 Instruments and controls
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
face of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades with new
ones. For replacement instructions,
refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
F11-39.
& Windshield wiper and washer
switches
The wipers operate only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.
! Windshield wipers
OFF: Off
: Intermittent
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “OFF” position.
! Wiper intermittent time control
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wipers.
The operating interval can be adjusted in
nine steps.
Black plate (151,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the
lever toward you. The wipers also operate
until you release the lever.
! Washer
To wash the windshield, push the washer
button at the end of the wiper control lever.
The washer fluid sprays until you release
the washer button. The wipers also
operate while you push the button.
& Rear window wiper and
washer switch
The wiper and washer operate when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”
position.
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
ON: Continuous
INT: Intermittent
OFF: Off
: Washer
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob at
the end of the wiper control lever upward
to the “INT” or “ON” position.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob to the
“OFF” position.
With the switch turned to the “INT”
position, the rear wiper will operate inter-
Instruments and controls 3-35
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (152,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-36 Instruments and controls
mittently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed (longer when the vehicle
speed is low; shorter when the vehicle
speed is high).
When you subsequently shift the trans-
mission into reverse, the rear wiper will
automatically switch to continuous opera-
tion. When the transmission is shifted to a
position other than reverse, the rear wiper
will return to intermittent operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob upward to
the “
” position. The washer fluid sprays
until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob down-
ward to the “
” position. The washer fluid
sprays, and 2 seconds later the rear wiper
operates. Releasing the knob stops the
washer fluid spray, and 3 seconds later
the rear wiper stops.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Inside mirror
The inside mirror has a day and night
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the
mirror toward you for the night position.
Push it away for the day position. The
night position reduces glare from head-
lights of vehicles behind you.
& Auto-dimming mirror/com-
pass (if equipped)
1) Auto dimming indicator
2) Left (mirror) button
3) Photosensor
4) Right (compass) button
5) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass.
. By pressing and releasing the left
button, the automatic dimming function is
toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the auto dimming
indicator light (green) located on the left
button will illuminate.
. By pressing and releasing the right
Black plate (153,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
button, the compass display is toggled on
or off. When the compass is on, an
illuminated compass reading will appear
in the upper right corner of the mirror.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. If the glare
from the headlights of vehicles behind you
strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it
and make the reflection surface of the
mirror dimmer to help prevent you from
being blinded. For this reason, use care
not to cover the sensors with stickers, or
other similar items. Periodically wipe the
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
cotton cloth or an applicator.
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. The zone setting is factory preset to
Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration
zones” map shown above to verify that the
compass zone setting is correct for your
geographical location.
2. Press and hold the right button for 3
seconds then release, and the word
“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the
zone number will be displayed.
3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly
to cycle the display through all possible
zone settings. Stop cycling when the
correct zone setting for your location is
displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
nonessential electrical accessories (rear
window defogger, heater/air conditioning
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3. Press and hold the right button for 6 - 7
seconds then release, and the compass
will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and
direction will be displayed.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”
disappears from the display (approxi-
mately two to three circles). The compass
is now calibrated.
5. Further calibration may be necessary
should outside influences cause the mirror
to read inaccurately. You will know that
this has occurred if your compass begins
to read in only limited directions. Should
you encounter this situation, return to step
one of the above procedure and recali-
brate the mirror.
Instruments and controls 3-37
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (154,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-38 Instruments and controls
& Auto-dimming mirror/com-
pass with HomeLink
®
(if
equipped)
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) LED
4) HomeLink
®
button 3
5) Sensor
6) Automatic dimming on/off button
7) Compass display button
8) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass
and HomeLink
®
wireless control system.
. By pressing the automatic dimming on/
off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the LED indicator
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter t he mir ror
housing and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
Black plate (155,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. Re fer to the “Compass calibration
zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the compass display
button for 3 seconds until the zone
selection comes up (a number will be
displayed in the mirror compass window).
3. Press the compass display button
repeatedly until the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the compass display button for 9
seconds until a “ C” ap pears i n the
compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
step 2 or step 3.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink
®
buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink
®
website at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
Note the following information about this
system.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System, it
complies with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission Rules in
the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry
Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes and modifications to this system
by anyone other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
trols, Inc.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
Instruments and controls 3-39
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (156,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-40 Instruments and controls
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device
to prevent potential harm or
damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for the de-
sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
ter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener programming in
the U.S.A.
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door
opener’s hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink
®
button you wish to pro-
gram.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
Black plate (157,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace
this programming step 4 with proce-
dures in “Programming for entrance
gates and garage door openers in
Canada” F3-42.
5. Hold down b oth buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
cates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed but-
ton and check the HomeLink
®
indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on con-
tinuously, your garage door should acti-
vate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be pro-
tected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform additional steps.
Refer to “Programming rolling-code-pro-
tected garage door openers in the U.S.A.”
F3-41.
! Programming rolling-code-protected
garage door openers in the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-40. Then
continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second per son
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1. Locate the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-
tion manual.
1) Training button
2. P ress the training button on t he
garage door opener motor head unit
(which activates the “training light” on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink
®
button that was programmed in the pre-
vious section. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
Instruments and controls 3-41
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (158,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-42 Instruments and controls
NOTE
Some garage door openers may re-
quire you to do the above press-hold-
release sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should acti vate when the HomeLin k
®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates and
garage door openers in Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 20
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink
®
button.
! Operating the HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
ing that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single HomeLink
®
button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been com-
pleted.
2. When the HomeLink
®
indicator light
Black plate (159,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
begins to flash slowly (after approximately
20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing the HomeLin k
®
button.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
button memory
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed H omeLink
®
buttons be
erased for security purposes.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink
®
button after
programming, contact HomeLink
®
at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
& Outside mirrors
! Remote control mirror switch
1) Selection switch
2) Direction control switch
The remote control mirrors operate only
Instruments and controls 3-43
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (160,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-44 Instruments and controls
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“Acc” position.
1. Press either end of the selection
switch, “L” for the left, “R” for the right.
2. Move the direction control switch in the
direction you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the selection swit ch to the
neutral position to prevent unintentional
operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
! Power folding mirror switch (if
equipped)
The power folding mirror switch operates
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “Acc” position.
To fold the outside mirrors, push the power
folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors,
push the switch again.
NOTE
. When the temperature is low, the
outside mirrors may stop during opera-
tion. Push the switch again. When the
outside mirrors do not work by switch
operation, move them several times by
manually. This makes it possible to
operate them by switch operation.
. When you operate the power folding
mirror switch continuously, it may not
work. This is not a malfunction. Oper-
ate after waiting for a short period of
time.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by swi tch operation. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by switch
operation.
Defogger and deicer
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The vehicle is equipped with a rear
Black plate (161,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
window defogger. For some models, the
outside mirror defogger and/or windshield
wiper deicer are/is also equipped. The
defogger and deicer system is activated
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Type A climate control system
Type B climate control system
Type C climate control system
To activate the defogger and deicer
system, push the control switch that is
located on the climate control panel. The
rear window defogger, outside mirror
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are
activated simultaneously. The indicator
light on the control switch illuminates while
the defogger and deicer system is acti-
vated.
To turn them off, push the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and the
outside mirrors have been cleared and the
windshield wiper blades have been deiced
completel y before that time, push the
control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
you have to push the control switch to turn
them on again.
For models with the automatic climate
control system, it is possible to have the
defogger and deicer system for the con-
tinuous operation mode set by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system con-
Instruments and controls 3-45
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (162,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3-46 Instruments and controls
tinuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface
of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
tively.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode, if the vehicle speed remains at
9 mph (15 km/h) or less for 15 minutes,
the windshield wiper deicer automati-
cally stops operating, though the rear
window defogger and outside mirror
defogger maintain continuous opera-
tion in this condition.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode, if the battery voltage drops
below the permissible level, continu-
ous operation of the defogger and
deicer system is canceled and the
system stops operating.
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dan-
gerous to drive without locking
the steering wheel. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
and result in personal injury.
Black plate (163,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment (if equipped)
1. Adjust the seat posi tion. Refer to
“Front seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Instruments and controls 3-47
3
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Ventilator control................................................. 4-2
Center ventilators................................................ 4-2
Side ventilators ................................................... 4-2
Climate control panel.......................................... 4-2
Type A ................................................................ 4-3
Type B ................................................................ 4-4
Type C ................................................................ 4-5
Automatic climate control system (type B
and C) ............................................................... 4-6
Type B ................................................................ 4-6
Type C ................................................................ 4-7
Temperature sensors........................................... 4-7
Manual climate control ....................................... 4-8
Airflow mode selection........................................ 4-8
Temperature control ............................................ 4-9
Fan speed control ............................................... 4-9
Air conditioner control ........................................ 4-9
Air inlet selection ................................................ 4-9
Defrosting........................................................... 4-10
Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner ...................................................... 4-10
Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-10
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ........................................................... 4-10
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit.............................................................. 4-11
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-11
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-11
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-11
Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-11
Air filtration system ........................................... 4-11
Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-12
Climate control
4
Black plate (166,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator control
& Center ventilators
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
& Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
3) Thumb-wheel
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open or close the ventilator, turn the
thumb-wheel up or down.
Climate control panel
Type A panel is used for the manual
climate control system.
Refer to “Manual climate control” F4-8.
Type B and C panels are used for the
automatic climate control systems.
Refer to “Automatic climate control system
(type B and C) ” F4-6 for automatic
operation.
Refer to “Manual climate control” F4-8 for
manual operation.
Black plate (167,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Type A
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
perature control” F4-9.)
2) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-9.)
3) Airflow control dial (Refer to “Airflow
mode selection” F4-8.)
4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer
system (Refer to “Defogger and deicer”
F3-44.)
5) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-9.)
6) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-9.)
Climate control
4-3
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (168,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4-4 Climate control
& Type B
1) Temperature control dial (driver’s side)
(Refer to “Temperature control” F4-9.)
2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control system (type B and C)” F4-
6.)
3) DUAL mode button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control system (type B and C)”
F4-6 and “Temperature control” F4-9.)
4) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control system (type B and C)” F4-6.)
5) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-9.)
6) Fan speed control button (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-9.)
7) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-8.)
8) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-9.)
9) Temperature control dial (passenger’s
side) (Refer to “Temperature control ”
F4-9.)
10) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-8 and “Defrosting” F4-10.)
11) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-44.)
Black plate (169,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Type C
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
perature control” F4-9.)
2) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control system (type B and
C)” F4-6 and “Fan speed control” F4-9.)
3) Airflow control dial (Refer to “Automatic
climate control system (type B and C)”
F4-6, “Airflow mode selection” F4-8 and
“Defrosting” F4-10.)
4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer
system (Refer to “Defogger and deicer”
F3-44.)
5) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-9.)
6) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-9.)
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may differ depending on the model.
Climate control 4-5
4
Black plate (170,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4-6 Climate control
Automatic climate control
system (type B and C)
When the automatic climate control mode
is selected, the outlet air temperature, the
fan speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet
control and air conditioner compressor
operation are automatically controlled.
To activate this mode, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. The blower fan rotates at a low
speed when the engine coolant tem-
perature is low.
. The air conditioner may not operate
in the following cases:
– When the cabin temperature is
low
– When the ambient temperature
decreases to close to 328F(08C)
. For efficient defogging or dehumidi-
fying in cold weather, press the “A/C”
button.
& Type B
1) Temperature control dial (driver’s side)
2) AUTO button
3) Temperature control dial (front passen-
ger’s side)
1. Set the preferred temperature using
temperature control dial.
2. Press the “AUTO” button. The FULL
AUTO mode is selected and the indicator
light “FULL AUTO” on the display illumi-
nates.
NOTE
. When the “DUAL” button is pressed,
separate temperature settings for the
driver’s side and passenger’s side can
be enabled (DUAL mode). To cancel the
DUAL mode, press the “DUAL” button
again. The temperature setting for the
passenger’s side becomes the same as
the setting for the driver’s side.
. If you operate any of the buttons on
the control panel other than the “OFF”
button, rear window defogger button
and temperature control dials during
FULL AUTO mode operation, the indi-
cator light “FULL” on the control panel
will turn off and the indicator light
“AUTO” will remain illuminated. You
can then manually control the system
as desired using the button you oper-
ated. To change the system back to the
FULL AUTO mode, press the “AUTO”
button.
3. To turn off the climate control system,
press the “OFF” button.
Black plate (171,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Type C
1) Fan speed control dial
2) Airflow control dial
3) Temperature control dial
1. Turn the airflow control dial and fan
speed control dial to “AUTO” position.
2. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control dial.
NOTE
Each function can be individually set to
AUTO mode independently of the
others. Any function set to AUTO mode
is controlled automatically. Any func-
tion not set to AUTO mode can be
manually adjusted as desired.
3. To turn off the climate control system,
turn the fan speed control dial to the “OFF”
position.
& Temperature sensors
1) Interior air temperature sensor
2) Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated
properly and become damaged, the sys-
tem may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
the sensors, observe the following pre-
cautions.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows.
– Solar sensor: beside the windshield
defroster grille.
– Interior air temperature sensor: next to
the steering column.
– Outside temperature sensor: behind
the front grille.
Climate control 4-7
4
Black plate (172,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4-8 Climate control
Manual climate control
& Airflow mode selection
Select the preferred airflow mode by
performing the following procedure.
. Turn the airflow control dial (type A and
C)
. Press the airflow mode selection button
or defroster button (type B)
Airflow modes are as follows.
(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and the
foot outlets
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets,
foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel
(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets and
both side outlets of the instrument panel
Black plate (173,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
NOTE
. When the “ ” mode or “ ” mode
is selected, the air conditioner com-
pressor automatically operates to more
quickly defog the windshield. At the
same time, the air inlet selection is
automatically set to the outside air
mode.
In this state:
– The air conditioner indicator light
does not illuminate.
– For type A, you cannot stop the
air conditioner compressor by
pressing the air conditioner button.
– For type A, you cannot select the
“recirculation” mode by pressing
the air inlet selection button.
& Temperature control
! Type A
Turn the temperature control dial over a
range from the blue side (cool) to red side
(warm) to regulate the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets.
! Type B and C
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred interior temperature. With the
dial set to your preferred temperature, the
system automatically adjusts the tempera-
ture of air supplied from the outlets such
that the preferred temperature is achieved
and maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,
the system provides maximum cooling
performance. If the dial is turned fully
clockwise, the system provides maximum
heating performance.
NOTE
For type B, when the “DUAL” button is
pressed, separate temperature settings
for the driver’s side and passenger’s
side can be enabled (DUAL mode). To
cancel the DUAL mode, press the
“DUAL” button again. The temperature
setting for the passenger’s side be-
comes the same as the setting for the
driver’s side.
& Fan speed control
The fan operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. Select the
preferred fan speed by turning the fan
speed control dial (type A and C), or by
pressing the fan speed control buttons
(type B).
& Air conditioner control
The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient
temperature decreases to approxi-
mately 328F(08C), the air conditioner
compressor stops operation.
& Air inlet selection
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty road. When the
ON position is selected, the “
” indicator
light illuminates.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Press the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and/or the
road is no longer dusty.
Climate control 4-9
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (174,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4-10 Climate control
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
Defrosting
Select the desired “ ” mode or “ ” mode
to defrost or dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows by performing the
following procedures.
For types A and C: Turn the airflow control
dial and select the “
” mode or “ ”
mode.
For type B: Press the airflow mode
selection button to select the “
” mode
or press the defroster button to select the
“
” mode.
NOTE
. When the “ ” mode or “ ” mode
is selected, the air conditioner com-
pressor automatically operates to more
quickly defog the windshield. (The air
conditioner indicator light does not
illuminate in this case.) At the same
time, the air inlet selection is automa-
tically set to the outside air mode. For
details, refer to “Airflow mode selec-
tion” F4-8.
. For type B, if the defroster button is
pressed while the “
” mode is se-
lected, it will return to the previous
mode before selecting the “
” mode.
Operating tips for heater and
air conditioner
& Cleaning ventilation grille
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking
in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
Black plate (175,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in
the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning
system before summer sea-
son
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air con-
ditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any prob lem with the air conditioning
system.
& Air conditioner compressor
shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
pedal is fully depressed such as during
rapid acceleration or when driving on a
steep upgrade.
& Refrigerant for your climate
control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
od of adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant is different from the method for
CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
result of using the wrong refrigerant are
not covered under warranty.
Air filtration system
Replace the filter element according to the
replacement schedu le as follows. This
schedule should be followed to maintain
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. It is
recommended that you have your filter
checked or replaced by your SUBARU
dealer. For replacement, use only a
genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000
km) whichever comes first
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
– Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
– Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
Climate control 4-11
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (176,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4-12 Climate control
mance if not properly maintained.
& Replacing an air filter
1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
(3) While pushing the stoppers on
both sides of the glove box, swing
the glove box down and remove it.
2. Remove the air filter.
3. Replace the air filter element with a
new one.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
Black plate (177,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
6. LABEL installation
(1) Fill out the information on the
service label (small).
1) Service label
(2) Attach the service label to the
driver’s side door pillar.
Climate control 4-13
4
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Antenna system .................................................. 5-3
Roof antenna (Rod type)...................................... 5-3
FM reception....................................................... 5-3
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4
Audio set ............................................................. 5-4
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6
Type C audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-7
Type D audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-8
Power and audio controls .................................. 5-9
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-9
Sound controls and audio settings ...................... 5-9
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-13
FM/AM selection................................................. 5-13
Tuning ............................................................... 5-13
HD Radio
TM
Technology (Digital AM and FM
Radio) (type D audio)........................................ 5-15
Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) and
RT (Radio Text) ................................................ 5-16
Station preset .................................................... 5-17
Satellite radio operat ion (if equipped) .............. 5-18
Sirius XM
TM
satellite radio (U.S.A. only)............... 5-18
Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-18
Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-19
Band selection ................................................... 5-20
Channel and category selection .......................... 5-20
Channel preset................................................... 5-21
Display selection (type A, B and C audio) ........... 5-22
CD player operation ........................................... 5-22
Play file.............................................................. 5-22
How to insert a CD (type A, C and D) .................. 5-23
How to insert a CD(s) (type B)............................ 5-23
How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-24
To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-24
Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-25
Repeating .......................................................... 5-25
Random playback .............................................. 5-26
Scan (type A, B and C audio) ............................. 5-27
Display selection (type A, B and C audio) ........... 5-27
Folder selection................................................. 5-28
How to eject a CD from the player (type A, C and D
audio).............................................................. 5-28
How to eject CDs from the player (type B) .......... 5-28
When the following messages are displayed....... 5-29
Auxiliary input jack (if equipped)...................... 5-29
Precautions to observe when handling a
compact disc................................................... 5-30
USB storage device / iPod
®
operations
(type C and D audio) ...................................... 5-32
Play file ............................................................. 5-32
Connectable USB storage device ....................... 5-32
Connectable iPod
®
models................................. 5-33
Connecting USB storage device / iPod
®
............. 5-33
How to play back ............................................... 5-34
To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-34
To select a chapter from the beginning when
connecting iPod
®
............................................. 5-34
Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-34
Repeating .......................................................... 5-35
Random playback .............................................. 5-35
SCAN (only when connecting USB storage
device) (type C audio) ...................................... 5-36
Audio
5
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Audio
Selecting category (only when connecting
iPod
®
).............................................................. 5-36
Display selection................................................ 5-36
Folder selection (only when connecting USB
storage device) ................................................ 5-36
Setting the playing speed (only when the
audiobook is playing) (type D audio)................. 5-36
When the following messages are displayed ....... 5-36
Audio control buttons (if equipped) .................. 5-37
MODE button ..................................................... 5-37
“
” and “ ” buttons ......................................... 5-38
Volume control buttons ...................................... 5-39
MUTE button (models without Hands-free
system)............................................................ 5-40
Bluetooth
®
audio (type C and D audio)............ 5-40
Media format ..................................................... 5-40
Setting Bluetooth
®
audio.................................... 5-40
Bluetooth
®
audio operation ................................ 5-41
Hands-free system (if equipped) ...................... 5-42
Tips for the Hands-free system .......................... 5-42
Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-43
Safety precautions............................................. 5-44
Using the Hands-free system ............................. 5-45
Bluetooth
®
setting ............................................. 5-53
Screensaver (type D audio) .............................. 5-55
Downloading picture .......................................... 5-56
Selecting picture................................................ 5-56
Erasing picture .................................................. 5-56
Black plate (181,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Antenna system
& Roof antenna (Rod type)
CAUTION
. Be sure to lower the antenna rod
before entering garages, parking
towers and other locations with
low ceilings.
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod is left attached, it
may scratch the roof.
. When reinstalling th e removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully
tighten it.
1) Unscrew
2) Remove
The roof antenna is installed in the center
at the rear part of the roof.
The antenna rod can be folded down
toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
Raise the antenna rod when listening to
the radio.
The antenna rod can be removed by
unscrewing it from its base.
& FM reception
Although FM is normally static free,
reception can be affected by the surround-
ing area, atmospheric conditions, station
strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause
momentary static, flutter or station inter-
ference. If reception continues to be
unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
Audio 5-3
5
Black plate (182,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-4 Audio
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing a citizen band radio or
other transmitting device in your vehicle.
Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
of the following audio sets. Refer to the
pages indicated in this section for operat-
ing details.
NOTE
If a cell phone is placed near the audio
set, it may cause the audio set to emit
noise when the phone receives calls.
This noise does not indicate an audio
set malfunction. Note that a cell phone
should be placed as far as possible
from the audio set.
Black plate (183,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Type A audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-9
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-13
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-18
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-22
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-29
Audio 5-5
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (184,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-6 Audio
& Type B audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-9
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-13
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-18
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-22
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-29
Black plate (185,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Type C audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-9
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-13
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-18
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-22
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-29
. USB storage device/iPod
®
operation:
refer to page 5-32
. Bluetooth
®
audio device: refer to page
5-40
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-42
Audio 5-7
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (186,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-8 Audio
& Type D audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-9
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-13
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-18
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-22
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-29
. USB storage device/iPod
®
operation:
refer to page 5-32
. Bluetooth
®
audio device: refer to page
5-40
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-42
Black plate (187,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Power and audio controls
& Power switch and volume
control
Type A and B audio
Type C and D audio
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF)
and volume control. The radio is turned
ON and OFF by pushing the dial, and the
volume is controlled by turning the dial.
& Sound controls and audio
settings
NOTE
. SPEED VOLUME CONTROL (SVC) is
a function that automatically adjusts
the volume according to the vehicle
speed. As the vehicle speed increases,
the audio volume automatically in-
creases to match the vehicle speed, in
order to create a pleasant listening
environment even as the driving noise
increases.
. For type B audio, SRS CS Auto is
equipped. SRS CS Auto creates a 5.1ch
equivalent surround field using 6 or 7
speakers that are installed in the
vehicle.
. For type D audio, SRS TruBass and
FOCUS are equipped.
. SRS Sound features:
(1) Sound originating from door
mount speakers can be heard at
ear level (built in SRS FOCUS effect)
(type B and D audio).
(2) Ultra rich bass sound can be
obtained from standard door mount
speakers (built in SRS TruBass
effect) (type B and D audio).
(3) Surround sound can be ob-
tained from 2-channel stereo
sources such as CD, MP3 and FM
(built in SRS Circle Surround II
effect) (type B audio).
(4) SRS CS Auto can position the
center channel image in the center
of the vehicle’s windshield. This
eliminates the need for a center
speaker (built in SRS Circle Sur-
round II phantom center and SRS
FOCUS effects) (type B audio).
. CS Auto, SRS and “
” symbol are
trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
. CS Auto technology is incorporated
under license from SRS Labs, inc.
. TruBass, FOCUS, SRS and “
”
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs,
Inc.
. TruBass and FOCUS technologies
are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
Audio 5-9
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (188,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-10 Audio
! Tone and balance control (type A, B
and C audio)
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
Each brief press of the “TUNE/TRACK/
CH” dial changes the control modes in the
following sequence.
Choose the preferred level for each mode
by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
! Other settings (type A, B and C
audio)
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
Each brief press of the “MENU” button
changes the control modes in the follow-
ing sequence.
Type A audio:
Type B audio:
Type C audio:
Choose the preferred settings for each
mode by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
! Audio settings (type D audio)
1. Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to
display “SETTING Menu”.
2. Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
to select the preferred menu. You can
select the menu as shown in the following
chart.
Black plate (189,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
First menu Second menu Third menu
Screen
OFF
——
Sound Tone
Bass
Mid
Treble
Balance
Balance
Fader
SVC —
SRS Sound —
Screen
Brightness —
Contrast —
Screen Size —
Screen Saver
Picture Select
Picture Down-
load
Picture Erase
BT Audio
Setup
Pair Audio
Player
—
Select Audio
Player
—
Set Passkey —
Delete Audio
Player
—
Others
HD ON/OFF —
Initialize
—
3. Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
to select the preferred setting for each
mode.
NOTE
Only “Screen OFF” can be displayed
while driving.
Audio 5-11
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (190,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-12 Audio
! Adjustable level of each mode
Mode Range of levels
(displayed)
Default
setting
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Volume Volume control 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control* 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
Tone and balance Bass control −8 to +8 0 For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control −8 to +8 0 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control −8 to +8 0 For less treble sound For more treble sound
Balance L9 to R9 0 Right channel attenuated Left channel attenuated
Fader R9 to F9 0 Front attenuated Rear attenuated
Other settings SPEED VOLUME OFF to 2 OFF For less auto volume change For more auto volume change
BEEP (Type A, B and C audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
CS Auto (Type B audio) OFF to ON OFF OFF ON
SRS Sound (Type D audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
Brightness (Type D audio) 0 to 15 8 For less brightness For more brightness
Contrast (Type D audio) 0 to 15 8 For less contrast For more contrast
Screen size (Type D audio) Normal to Wide Wide Normal Wide
HD ON/OFF (Type D audio) OFF to ON ON ON OFF
Initialize (Type D audio) Cancel to Initialize Cancel Initialize
Cancel
*: For type A and B audio, AUX volume can be adjusted only when an AUX audio product is connected.
Black plate (191,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
FM/AM radio operation
& FM/AM selection
Type A and B audio
Type C and D audio
Push the “FM/AM” button when the radio
is off to turn on the radio.
Push the “FM/AM” button when the radio
is on to select the reception mode.
Each brief press of the “FM/AM” button
changes the radio in the following se-
quence starting from the last radio band
you selected.
Type A, B and C audio:
Type D audio:
& Tuning
! Manual tuning
Type A and B audio
Type C and D audio
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
wise to increase the tuning frequency and
turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counter-
clockwise to decrease it.
Turning the dial changes the frequency by
steps of 10 kHz in the AM mode or 0.2
MHz in the FM mode.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” (type A, B and C
audio)/“STEREO” (type D audio) will
illuminate when an FM stereo broadcast
is received.
! Seek tuning (SEEK)
Type A and B audio:
Seek up
Seek down
Type C audio:
Seek up
Seek down
Type D audio:
Seek up
Seek down
If you press the “ ” or “ ” button briefly,
the radio will automatically search for a
receivable station and stop at the first one
it finds.
Audio 5-13
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (192,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-14 Audio
This function may not be available when
radio signals are weak. When this hap-
pens, perform manual tuning to select the
desired station.
! Scan tuning (SCAN)
Type A and B
audio*
1
Type C audio*
1
Type D audio*
2
*1: Press the button briefly.
*2: Press and hold the button.
If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio
will switch to the scan mode. In this mode,
the radio scans through the radio band
until a receivable station is found. The
radio will stop at the station for 5 seconds
(type A, B and C audio)/10 seconds (type
D audio) while displaying the frequency,
after which scanning will continue until the
entire band has been scanned.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the S CAN mode and to stop at any
displayed channel.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
tall buildings and hills.
! PTY (Program type) group tuning
(only FM reception)
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
Type D audio
Press the indicated button to change to
the PTY selection mode. At this time, the
PTY group that you are currently listening
to (type A, B and C audio)/that you
selected the last time (type D audio) will
be displayed for 10 seconds. In the PTY
selection mode, “PTY” is displayed on the
screen.
! PTY (Program type) group selection
In the PTY selection mode, press the
following button to change the PTY group
by one step at a time.
Type A and B audio:
PTY group up by
one step
PTY group down by
one step
Type C audio:
PTY group up by
one step
PTY group down by
one step
This operation only changes the display. It
does not change the station that is
currently being received.
! Seek in PTY (Program type) group
(type A, B and C audio)
Type A and B audio:
Seek up
Seek down
Black plate (193,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Type C audio:
Seek up
Seek down
In the PTY selection mode, when the
preferred PTY group has been selected,
pressing the “SEEK” button “
” or “ ”
seeks within that PTY group.
The control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
! Seek in PTY (Program type) group
(type D audio)
In the PTY selection mode, when the
preferred PTY group has been selected,
turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial seeks
within that PTY group. Turning the dial
clockwise seeks up. Turning the dial
counterclockwise seeks down.
The control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
& HD Radio
TM
Technology (Di-
gital AM and FM Radio) (type
D audio)
HD Radio Technology is fueling the digital
radio revolution in the United States and
around the world.
The digital technology enables broadcas-
ters to offer new and unique FM content
via HD2 / HD3 channels, crystal-clear
sound and data services on both AM
and FM bands - all free, with no subscrip-
tion fee.
HD Radio Technology manufactured un-
der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-
tion. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio
®
and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos
are proprietary trademarks of iBiqui ty
Digital Corp.
For more information, visit www.hdradio.
com.
Press the
button while receiving the
FM radio (except analog broadcast). The
next channel of the station that is being
received will be received.
! Mode selection
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial and
select the HD Radio ON mode (hybrid
mode) or OFF mode (analog mode).
! iTunes
®
tagging
To tag the received song, press and hold
the
button for more than 1.5
seconds. Connect the iPod
®
to store the
tagged song to the iPod
®
. When the iPod
®
is connected to iTunes
®
, you can pur-
chase the tagged songs from the Apple
®
iTunes Music Store.
For the models of iPod
®
that support
iTunes
®
tagging, refer to the following
website: www.hdradio.com/tagging.php?
id=itunes.
! HD Radio indicators
Each indicator illuminates under the fol-
lowing conditions.
. The
indicator illuminates while the
digital broadcast is received during the HD
Radio ON mode.
. The “TAG” indicator illuminates while
you can operate the iTunes
®
tagging.
Audio 5-15
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (194,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-16 Audio
. The “LIVE” indicator illuminates while
the “Ballgame” is received.
. The “STEREO ” indicator illuminates
while the FM stereo broadcast is received.
. The “PTY” indicator illuminates during
the PTY selection mode.
! About HD Radio
NOTE
. HD Radio Technology is a hybrid
broadcasting system that employs di-
gital and analog signals.
. When the vehicle moves outside the
digital broadcasting area (that is nar-
rower than the analog broadc asting
area due to the FCC output require-
ments), the radio reception automati-
cally changes from the digital signal to
the analog signal. When the vehicle
reenters the digital broadcasting area
again, the radio reception automatically
changes from the analog signal to the
digital signal. When in a digital mode
the
Logo will be in orange on the
radio display.
. Depending on the broadcasting sta-
tion, a condition such as a sound delay,
echo effect or skipping sound may
occur. However, this does not indicate
a malfunction.
. Depending on the broad casting
area, the digital signal may not be
received in an area where the analog
signal can be properly received, or the
system frequently switches the chan-
nels between the digital and analog
signals. However, this does not indi-
cate a malfunction. If this frequent
switching between digital and analog
causes annoyance, set the radio to the
analog mode (HD Radio off mode) that
provides the same radio broadcasting
quality as a conventional radio.
& Displaying radio PS (Pro-
gram Service Name) and RT
(Radio Text)
Type A and B audio
Type C and D audio
! Type A, B and C audio
If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or
RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing
the “TEXT” button changes the display
among PS, RT and frequency. The default
setting is “PS”.
NOTE
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for PS is 8.
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for RT is 64.
. If RT is 13 characters or longer,
press and hold the “TEXT” button for
0.5 second or longer in order to change
the page.
! Type D audio
Push the “TEXT” button to show the next
page when the text is not fully displayed
while the PSD (Program Service Data) or
RT (Radio Text) service is received.
NOTE
. When the HD Radio function is
turned on, PSD provides additional
information about the broadcast. Text
data such as “Title” and “Artist” is
displayed on the screen.
. When the HD Radio function is
turned off (HD Radio off mode), the
radio text is displayed on the screen
while receiving the broadcasting sta-
tion with RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data
System).
Black plate (195,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Station preset
! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM/AM” button to select the
preferred reception mode.
2. Select the preferred station.
3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons (from
to ) for more
than 1.5 seconds to store the frequency. If
the button is pressed and held for less
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
will remain in memory.
NOTE
. Up to six stations for each reception
mode may be preset.
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset buttons.
. If a cell phone is placed near the
radio, it may cause the radio to emit
noise when it receives calls. This noise
does not indicate a radio malfunction.
! Selecting preset stations
1. Press the “FM/AM” button to select the
preferred reception mode.
2. Press the preferred preset button
(from
to ) briefly.
! Auto-store (type D audio)
Using the Auto-store function, you can
automatically store 6 stations on the
current waveband (FM-AS or AM-AS) by
pressing and holding the
button for
1.5 seconds or longer. Use Auto-store to
quickly find the strongest stations, for
example when traveling through different
reception areas.
NOTE
. When the HD Radio function is
turned on, Auto-store cannot be used
while receiving the broadcasting sta-
tion with SPS (Supplemental Program
Service).
. When you use Auto-store, the new
stations replace any stations pre-
viously stored.
. Interrupting Auto-store: If you acci-
dentally press the
(Auto-store)
button, you can cancel the Auto-store
function before it has been completed
as follows.
– Switching to the other source
mode
– Pressing the
button
– Switching to the other band
– Turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial
– Pressing the “SCAN” button
! Displaying and selecting preset
stations (type D audio)
1. Press and hold the
button for 1.5
seconds or longer during AM/FM recep-
tion to display the radio screen.
2. Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
to select the stations.
Audio 5-17
5
Black plate (196,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-18 Audio
Satellite radio operation (if
equipped)
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to
install the SUBARU genuine satellite
receiver (optional equipment) and to enter
into a contract. For details, please contact
your SUBARU dealer.
& Sirius XM
TM
satellite radio
(U.S.A. only)
Sirius XM
TM
is a continental U.S. based
satellite radio service, including music,
news, sports, talk and children’s program-
ming. Sirius XM
TM
provides digital quality
audio and text information, including song
title and artist name. A service fee is
required to receive the Sirius XM
TM
service. For more information, contact
Sirius XM
TM
at www.siriusxm.com.
& Satellite radio reception
Satellite radio signals are best received in
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
tunnels or other structures that may
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
stances that may result in signal loss
include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
or driving on the lower level of a multi-
tiered road or inside of a parking garage.
To help reduce this condition, satellite
radio providers have install ed ground-
based repeaters in h eavily p opulated
areas. However, you may still experience
reception problems in some areas.
! Sirius XM
TM
satellite radio reception
tips for antenna on the windshield
(for U.S.A. only — if equipped)
For some models, the satellite radio
antenna is fixed to the upper right hand
corner of the windshield.
The Sirius XM
TM
satellite radio receiver
that is fitted to your vehicle receives the
necessary signals from two specially
designated satellites that are in a geosta-
tionary orbit over the equator. One satellite
covers the east coast and the other covers
the west coast. Both of them direct their
signals north. These signals are then
relayed throughout the radio reception
area by a network of ground repeater
stations. The satellite radio signals are
transmitted as “line of sight” signals. The
line of sight signals can be blocked by
objects such as buildings, but the network
of repeater stations allows signal cover-
age within urban areas such as cities.
You may experience problems in receiving
Sirius XM
TM
satellite radio signals in the
following situations.
. If you are driving northward in a coastal
area
Because the satellite radio antenna is
located on the windshield, the signal
comes from the south and may not be
able to reach the antenna in some
circumstances when you are driving north.
Black plate (197,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a
covered parking area
. If you are driving beneath the top level
of a multi-level freeway
. If you drive under a bridge
. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the
signal
. If you are driving in a valley where the
surrounding hills or peaks block the signal
from the south
. If you are driving on a mountain road
where the southern direction is blocked by
mountains
. If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (10 m or more),
for example on a road that goes through a
dense forest
. The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the repeater
station network.
Please note that these may be other
unforeseen circumstances when there
are problems with the reception of Sirius
XM
TM
satellite radio signals.
NOTE
The channel guide is not yet updated if
the update is done while receiving the
Sirius XM
TM
satellite radio signal. To
complete the update, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position and then
to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
& Displaying satellite radio ID
of tuner
When you activate satellite radio, you
should have your satellite radio tuner ID
ready because each tuner is identified by
its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
The satellite radio ID will be needed when
you activate satellite radio and receive
satellite radio customer support.
The satellite radio ID can be found on the
audio display by tuning the channel to “0”.
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to select
the satellite radio channel.
NOTE
For Sirius, change the display to an
indication mode other than the channel
number after performing the above
operation.
Audio 5-19
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (198,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-20 Audio
& Band selection
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
Type D audio
Push the “ SAT” button when the radio is
off to turn on the radio.
Push the “ SAT” button when the radio is
on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-
tion mode.
& Channel and category selec-
tion
! Channel selection
Type A and B audio
Type C and D audio
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
wise to select the next channel and turn
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counterclock-
wise to select the previous channel.
! Skip channel selection
When in the SAT mode, perform t he
following procedures to change to the
channel selection mode.
Type A and B audio: Press and hold the
following button.
Channel up by 10
steps
Channel down by 10
steps
Type C audio: Press and hold the
following button.
Channel up by 10
steps
Channel down by 10
steps
Type D audio: Press the following button
briefly.
Channel up by 10
steps
Channel down by 10
steps
! Category selection
! Type A, B and C audio
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
To activate the category search mode,
press the “PTY/CAT” button. To deactivate
the category search mode, press the
“PTY/CAT” button again.
When in the category search mode, press
the following button to change the cate-
gory up or down.
Black plate (199,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Type A and B audio:
Category up by one
step
Category down by
one step
Type C audio:
Category up by one
step
Category down by
one step
When a category is selected, turning the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial selects channels
only within the selected category.
The control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
! Type D audio
When in the SAT mode, press the
button to change the ca tegory search
mode.
When in the category search mode, press
the following button to change the cate-
gory up or down.
Category up by one
step
Category down by
one step
When a category is selected, turning the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial selects channels
only within the selected category. The
control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
! Channel scan
Type A and B
audio*
1
Type C audio*
1
Type D audio*
2
*1: Press the button briefly.
*2: Press and hold the button.
Press the “SCAN” button to change the
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,
under the selected category, the radio
scans through the channel until a station
is found. The radio will stop at the station
for 5 seconds while displaying the channel
number, after which scanning will continue
until the entire channel has been scanned
from the low end to the high end.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed channel.
& Channel preset
! How to preset channels
1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1,
SAT2 or SAT3 reception mode.
2. Select the desired channel.
3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons (from
to ) for more
than 1.5 seconds to store the channel. If
the button is pressed and held for less
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
will remain in memory.
NOTE
. Up to six SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3
channels each may be preset.
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, al l channels stored i n the
preset buttons are cl eared. If thi s
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset buttons.
Audio 5-21
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (200,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-22 Audio
! Selecting preset channels
1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1,
SAT2 or SAT3 reception mode.
2. Press the preferred preset button
(from
to ) briefly.
! Displaying and selecting preset
stations (type D audio)
1. Press and hold the
button for 1.5
seconds or longer during satellite radio
reception to display the radio screen.
2. Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
to select the stations.
& Display selection (type A, B
and C audio)
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
Press the “TEXT” button while receiving
the satellite radio to change the display as
follows.
CD player operation
NOTE
. Make sure to always insert a disc
with the label side up. If a disc is
inserted with the label side down, the
player displays “CHECK DISC”. Refer
to “When the following messages are
displayed” F5-29.
. If a disc is inserted during a radio
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
broadcast.
. After the last song finishes, the disc
will automatically return to track 1 (the
first track on the disc) and will auto-
matically play back.
. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain
ones.
. Mini CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are
not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected.
. CDs that can be played back are
accompanied by the following restric-
tions.
– Maximum number of folders: 255
– Maximum number of tracks in a
folder: 255
– Maximum number of files on a
CD: 510 (type A, B and C audio)/999
(type D audio)
& Play file
NOTE
. Copyright protected MP3/WMA/AAC
files will not be played by the system.
The player will automatically skip to the
next file (track).
. WMA9 Lossless, WMA9 Profes-
sional and WMA9 voice cannot be
played.
MP3:
. Based on MPEG1, 2 and 2.5 Layer3
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
. Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320
. Supports variable bit rates
WMA (type A, B and C audio):
. Based on Windows Media Audio 9
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192
WMA (type D audio):
. Based on Windows Media Audio 7, 8
and 9
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192
Black plate (201,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
AAC (type C audio):
. Based on MPEG4 AAC
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
. Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320
. Number of channels: 1 to 2ch
AAC (type D audio):
. Based on MPEG2 AAC and MPEG4
AAC
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
. Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320
. Number of channels: 1 to 2ch
& How to insert a CD (type A, C
and D)
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole
while gripping the edge of the disc, then
insert it in to the slot (with the label side
up) and the player will automatically pull
the disc into position.
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE
DISC INSERTION SLOT AT THE SAME
TIME.
& How to insert a CD(s) (type B)
1. Briefly press the button. If the
magazine in the player has an empty
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
empty position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is
no empty position in the magazine.
2. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi-
nates, insert the disc. Once you have
inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will
turn off. The disc will then be automatically
drawn in, and the player will begin to play
back the first track of the disc.
. To insert more discs in succession,
repeat steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
be loaded with discs in the ascending
order of position number.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
after you have pressed the
button,
the player will begin to play back the first
track of the last disc you have inserted.
. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a
disc is already inserted in the correspond-
ing position of the magazine.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press
or button, the
player will enter the standby mode. Press
the
button to start playback.
! Inserting a disc in a desired posi-
tion
1. Briefly press the
button. If the
magazine in the player has an empty
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
empty position will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indica-
tor of which steadily lights up are already
loaded with discs.
2. Press the disc select button (from
to ) at the position where you
want to insert a disc.
3. When the “LOAD” indicator i llumi-
nates, insert the disc. Once you have
inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will
turn off. The disc will then be automatically
drawn in, and the player will begin to play
the first track on the disc.
. If you wish to insert another disc,
repeat the procedure beginning with step
1.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
after you have pressed the
button,
the player will begin to play back the first
track of the last disc you have inserted.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press
or button, the
player will enter standby mode. Press the
button to start playback.
Audio 5-23
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (202,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-24 Audio
! Loading all the magazine (full disc
loading mode)
1. If you continue to press the
button for more than 1.5 seconds, the
player will produce beep sound and will
enter the full disc loading mode.
2. When the disc number indicator
flashes and “ALL LOAD” indicator illumi-
nates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a
disc is successfully loaded during this
period, the disc number indicator will stop
blinking and will steadily light.
3. When the loading of a disc is com-
plete, the next disc number indicator will
blink. Then repeat step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs
by repeating steps 2 and 3, the player will
start playback of the discs, beginning with
the one inserted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15
seconds interval, the full disc loading
mode will be canceled, and the player will
start playback of the disc inserted first.
& How to play back a CD
! When there is no CD inserted
Properly insert a CD. Refer to “How to
insert a CD (type A, C and D)” F5-23 /
“How to insert a CD(s) (type B)” F5-23.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start
playback of the CD, beginning with the
first track.
! When CD is in the player (type A)
When the
button is pressed, the
player will start playback.
! When there are CDs loaded (type B)
Press a desired one of the disc select
buttons (from
to ) the disc
number indicator of which steadily lights
up. The player will then start playback of
the selected CD, beginning with the first
track.
If a disc that the player cannot read has
been loaded, the player will display the
message “CHECK DISC”.
! When CD is in the player (type C
and D)
Each brief press of the
button
changes the modes in the following
sequence.
*: For type C audio, “BT-A” is displayed.
When the CD mode is selected, the player
will start playback.
& To select a track from the
beginning
Type A and B audio
Type C and D audio
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
wise to skip to the beginning of the next
track. Each time the dial is turned, the
indicated track number will increase.
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counter-
clockwise to skip to the beginning of the
current track. Each time the dial is turned,
the indicated track number will decrease.
NOTE
With an MP3, WMA or AAC (type C and
D audio):
. Skipping past the last track will take
you back to the first track in the folder.
. Skipping past the first track will take
you to the last track in the folder.
Black plate (203,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Fast-forwarding and rewind-
ing
Fast-forward-
ing
Rewinding
Type A and B
audio
Type C audio
Type D audio
Press and hold the “ ” button to fast-
forward the track.
Press and hold the “
” button to rewind
the disc/folder.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding/
rewinding.
NOTE
. If you fast-forward to the end of the
last track, fast-forwarding will stop and
the player will start playback beginning
with the first track.
. If you rewind to the beginning of the
first track, rewinding will stop and the
player will start playback.
. In an MP3, WMA or AAC folder (type
C and D audio), the player will start
playback beginning with the first track
of the current folder.
& Repeating
To repeat a track, briefly press the follow-
ing button (repeat button) while the track is
playing.
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
Type D audio
Each time you briefly press the button, the
mode changes in the following se-
quences.
Type A and C audio:
*: Type C audio only
Type B audio:
Type D audio:
NOTE
. The “RPT” (type A, B and C audio)/
“One PRT” (type D audio) indication
refers to the repeat playback of a single
track. It repeats the track that is play-
ing.
. The “F-RPT” (type A, B and C audio)/
“Folder RPT” (type D audio) indication
refers to the repeat playback of a folder.
It repeats the all of the tracks in the
folder. It is p ossible to select the
function when the MP3/WMA/AAC for-
mat track is playing.
. The “D-RPT” indication refers to the
repeat playback of a disc. It repeats the
tracks on the CD. It is only possible to
select this function for type B audio.
To cancel the track repeat-play mode,
briefly press the “RPT” button and select
CANCEL. The “RPT” indication will turn
off, and the normal playback mode will be
resumed.
NOTE
The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
Audio 5-25
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (204,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-26 Audio
steps.
. Press the “
” button.
. Press the disc select button (type B
audio).
. Press the “SCAN ” button (type A, B
and C audio).
. Press the “LOAD” button when
there is free space in the CD magazine
(type B audio).
& Random playback
To play back a tracks at random, press the
following button (random button) while a
track is playing.
Type A and B
audio*
1
Type C audio*
1
Type D audio*
2
*1: Press the button for 0.5 second or longer.
*2: Press the button briefly.
Each time you press the button, the mode
changes in the following sequences.
Type A audio:
Type B audio:
Type C audio:
Type D audio:
NOTE
. The “RDM” (type A, B and C audio)/
“Track RDM” (type D audio) indication
refers to the random playback of the
tracks. It randomly repeats the tracks
on the CD. It is possible to select the
function when formats other than the
MP3/WMA/AAC format CD is playing.
. The “F-RDM” (type A, B and C
audio)/“Folder RDM” (type D audio)
indication refers to the random play-
back in the folder. It randomly repeats
the tracks in the folder. It is possible to
select the function when an MP3/WMA/
AAC format track is playing.
. The “D-RDM” indication refers to the
random playback of a disc. It randomly
repeats the tracks on the CD. It is
possible to select the function when
an MP3/WMA format track is playing.
To cancel the random playback mode,
press the “RDM” button again and select
CANCEL.
The “RDM” indication will turn off, and the
normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
Random playback will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps.
. Press the “
” button.
. Press the disc select button (type B
audio).
. Press the “SCAN” button (type A, B
and C audio).
. Press the “LOAD” button when
there is free space in the CD magazine
(type B audio).
Black plate (205,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Scan (type A, B and C audio)
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
The scan mode lets you listen to the first
10 seconds of each track in succession.
Press the “SCAN” button to start scanning
upward beginning with the track following
the currently selected one.
After all tracks on the disc/in the folder
have been scanned, normal playback will
be resumed. To cancel the scan mode,
press the “SCAN” button again.
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following steps.
. Press the “RPT” button.
. Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER/PTY/CAT” button.
. Press the “
” button.
. Press the disc select button (type B
audio).
. Se lect the mode other than CD
mode.
. Press the “LOAD” button when
there is free space in the CD magazine
(type B audio).
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
& Display selection (type A, B
and C audio)
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
If you press the “TEXT” button during
playback, the display will change as
shown in the following sequence.
For CD-DA:
For MP3/WMA/AAC:
For iPod
®
:
! Page (track/folder title) scroll
If you press and hold the “TEXT” button
again for at least 0.5 second, the title will
be scrolled so you can see all of it.
NOTE
. For type A and B audio, the display
is designed to show titles for up to 24
characters.
. For type C audio, the display is
designed to show titles as shown in
the following items.
– When playing a CD-DA: 256 char-
acters
– When playing an MP3/WMA/AAC:
64 characters
– When playing an iPod
®
:255
characters
. If no operations are performed for 10
seconds, the screen that was displayed
before pressing and holding the
“TEXT” button will be shown.
Audio 5-27
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (206,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-28 Audio
& Folder selection
NOTE
. Sel ecting folders in this way is
possible only within a single disc.
. Only MP3/WMA/AAC folders are re-
cognized when an attempt to select the
next or previous folder is made. If no
appropriate folder exists on the disc,
pressing the “
” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER/PTY/CAT” button starts play-
back beginning with the first track.
Press the following buttons briefly.
Type A and B audio:
To select the next
folder
To go back to the
previous folder
Type C audio:
To select the next
folder
To go back to the
previous folder
Type D audio:
To select the next
folder
To go back to the
previous folder
& How to eject a CD from the
player (type A, C and D
audio)
When a disc is being played back or when
a disc is in the player, press the
button. The disc will be ejected.
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out. Vibration might make it fall
out.
. If the disc is left ejected for more
than approximately 15 seconds after
the ignition switc h is turned to the
“OFF” position, a disc protection func-
tion will operate, automatically reload-
ing the disc. In this case, the disc is not
played.
& How to eject CDs from the
player (type B)
! Ejecting a CD from the player
You can select and remove only one disc
at a time from the discs that are loaded.
1. Use the disc select button (from
to ) to select the disc to be ejected.
2. Briefly press the
button. The
selected disc will be ejected. The disc
number indicator will flash at this time.
When you remove the ejected disc, the
disc number indicator will turn off.
To remove more discs in su ccession,
repeat steps 1 and 2.
! Ejecting all discs from the player
(all disc ejection mode)
1. If you continue to press the
button, the player will produce beep sound
and will enter the all disc ejection mode. At
this time, the disc number indicator and
“ALL EJECT” indicator will flash.
2. Remove the disc that has been
ejected. The other discs loaded will then
be ejected one after another. If you do not
remove the disc that has been ejected, the
“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.
Black plate (207,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out. Vibration might make it fall
out.
. If you press the
button while
the player is in all disc ejection mode,
the mode will be cancelled following
ejection of the disc that is currently
being ejected.
. If you press the
button or
button while the player is in all disc
ejection mode, the player will draw in
the discs that have been ejected and
play them.
& When the following mes-
sages are displayed
If one of the following messages is
displayed while operating the CD player,
determine the cause based on the follow-
ing information. If you cannot clear those
messages, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
Press the
button to eject the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation
and also check that the correct disc is
inserted. Do not try to eject the disc
forcibly. Mini CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
are not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected and this message
will be displayed. If the disc cannot be
ejected or this message remains dis-
played, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
Press the
button to eject the disc.
Check that the disc is not damaged or
scratched, and also check that the disc is
inserted correctly. This message may
appear when using some CD-RW discs.
Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
mini CDs are not supported) and data
format are correct. This player can only
play MP3, WMA (all models) and AAC
(type C and D audio) data formats. If the
disc cannot be ejected or this message
remains displayed, please contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Auxiliary input jack (if
equipped)
1) Models without Hands-free system
2) Models with Hands-free system
You can connect an external audio device
to the vehicle’s audio system and play
back audio via the vehicle’s speakers.
An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is present in
the center console. A stereo mini pin plug
(3.5ø) can be inserted in this jack. The
connection cable is available at electrical
appliance or similar stores.
To use the AUX input jack:
1. Connect a portable audio player to the
AUX input jack.
Audio 5-29
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (208,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-30 Audio
Type A and B audio
Type C and D audio
2. Press the “CD/AUX” button on the
audio control panel to turn on the auxiliary
audio input.
3. Play back the portable audio player.
Refer to the instruction manual for the
portable audio player.
NOTE
. The AUX input jacks of the models
with the genuine SUBARU navigation
system are the 3.5 mm stereo jack type.
For detailed information, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the
navigation system.
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound
via t he vehicle’s speakers that are
connected to the vehicle audio set
may be very low. If you turn up the
volume of the audio set, the volume
becomes louder. However, when you
change from one portable audio player
to another one, the volume levels via
the vehicle’s speakers may be signifi-
cantly louder compared to the prior
device. To avoid a large volume differ-
ence, turn down the volume when you
change between portable audio
players.
. In some cases, when the sound
volume of the portable audio player is
low, the sound quality may become
impaired when you turn up the volume
of the vehicle audio system. In this
case, adjust the sound volume of the
portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs be-
cause of a bad connection between the
portable player and the vehicle audio
system. Try cleaning the stereo jack
and audio plug.
. If the noise is not reduced, check for
disconnection of the cord or a malfunc-
tion of the portable player.
Precautions to observe when
handling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
following. Also, some compact discs
cannot be played.
Black plate (209,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface
from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, n ear heate rs or in vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
. Insert discs one by one into the CD
player (type B audio).
Audio 5-31
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (210,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-32 Audio
USB storage device / iPod
®
operations (type C and D
audio)
& Play file
Refer to “Play file” F5-22.
& Connectable USB storage
device
Mass storage class USB memory can be
connected. USB storage devices that can
be played back are accompanied by the
following restrictions.
. Maximum directory layers: 8 layers
(including the ROOT)
. Maximum number of files in a folder:
255
. Maximum number of folders: 512 (type
C audio)/255 (type D audio) (including the
ROOT)
. Maximum number of files on the
device: 130,560 (type C audio)/2,500
(type D audio)
NOTE
. HUB class USB memory cannot be
played.
. ATAPI subclass USB c annot be
played.
. For type C audio, High Speed USB
2.0 cannot be played.
. A USB memory that is powered by a
source other than t he U SB power
supply (for example, an AC power
adapter, etc.) cannot be operated.
. A USB memory that is connected to
the memory card reader or multi card
reader cannot be operated.
. If the USB memory consists of two
drives or more, the system will recog-
nize only one of the drives after con-
necting the USB memory.
. The contents stored on the USB
memory may not be played in the same
order as they appear on a personal
computer.
. A personal computer can not be
used even if it is connected to the
system using a USB cable.
. If the USB memory has a security
function, the contents stored on the
USB memory cannot be played by the
system.
. A USB memory and an iPod
®
cannot
be connected to the system at the
same time.
Black plate (211,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Connectable iPod
®
models
Model Firmware version
iPod
®
with video 1.3
classic 2.0.4
nano 1G 1.3.1
nano 2G 1.1.3
nano 3G 1.1.3
nano 4G 1.0.4
nano 5G 1.0.2
nano 6G 1.0
touch 1G 3.1.3
touch 2G 3.1.3
touch 3G 4.1
touch 4G 4.1
iPhone
®
1G 3.1.3
3G 3.1.3
3G S 3.1.3
4G
4.1
CAUTION
Do not connect an iPod
®
other than
the previously stated models. Doing
so may result in a malfunction or,
depending on conditions, cause a
fire.
NOTE
. iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
. You are only permitted to personally
copy and play copyright-free material
or material that is legally permitted to
be copied and played by using an
iPod
®
and iTunes. Copyright infringe-
ment is prohibited by law.
. To check the firmware version of an
iPod
®
, connect it to a computer and
check the device manager. For further
information, see the User’s Guide that
comes with the iPod
®
. To update the firmware version of an
iPod
®
, visit the Apple Inc. website.
& Connecting USB storage de-
vice / iPod
®
WARNING
Do not operate an iPod
®
while
driving. Doing so may distract your
attention from driving and could
lead to an accident.
CAUTION
. If the data stored on an iPod
®
is
deleted while it is connected to
the in-vehicle system, the data
cannot be recovered.
. Do not store an iPod
®
in the
vehicle. If an iPod
®
is left in the
vehicle for a long period of time,
it may be deformed, discolored
or damaged by high temperature.
NOTE
. Even if a USB storage device or
iPod
®
is connected, it cannot be played
unless the USB/iPod
®
mode is se-
lected.
. A movie cannot be played while a
USB storage device or an iPod
®
is
connected.
. While an iPod
®
is connected, the
iPod
®
cannot be operated using the
click wheel on the iPod
®
(except some
models).
. When using an iPod
®
by connecting
it to in-vehicle equipment, the order of
the list items displayed on the in-
vehicle equipment may be di fferent
from that on the iPod
®
. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
. An iPod
®
battery that is connected
Audio 5-33
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (212,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-34 Audio
to in-vehicle equipment will be charged
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “Acc” position. However, activation
of the iPod
®
may be delayed if the
battery charge of the iPod
®
is low.
. If an iPod
®
does not activate after
operation, disconnect the connection
cable from the iPod
®
and reset it. For
the resetting procedure, see the User’s
Guide that comes with the iPod
®
.
. If an iPod
®
and the connection cable
are connected improperly, the iPod
®
cannot be powered on or will not be
recognized by in-vehicle equipment. In
this case, disconnect the connection
cable from the iPod
®
, and then connect
it again.
The USB connector is located in the
center console. Use the connector to
connect a USB storage device/iPod
®
.
& How to play back
1. Connect a USB storage device/iPod
®
.
2. Press the
button. Each time you
briefly press the button, the mode
changes in the following sequence.
Type C and D audio:
When the USB/iPod
®
mode is selected,
the player will start playback of the USB
storage device/iPod
®
.
NOTE
. Depending on the number of tracks
stored on the iPod
®
and the firmware
version, the iPod
®
may not activate
smoothly after operation or not work
properly.
. Do not disco nnect the connector
from the iPod
®
during iPod
®
operation.
& To select a track from the
beginning
Select a track in the same way as for a
CD. For details, refer to “To select a track
from the beginning” F5-24.
& To select a chapter from the
beginning when connecting
iPod
®
When playing podcasts or audiobooks,
select a chapter in the same way as for a
CD. For details, refer to “To select a track
from the beginning” F5-24.
& Fast-forwarding and rewind-
ing
Fast-forwarding and rewinding are oper-
ated in the same way as for a CD. For
details, refer to “Fast-forwarding and
rewinding” F5-25.
NOTE
When connecting iPod
®
:
. When the end of a track is reached
while fast-forwarding, fast-forwarding
ends and play begins from the begin-
ning of the next track.
. When the beginning of a track is
reached while rewinding, rewinding
ends and play begins from the begin-
ning of the track.
Black plate (213,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Repeating
! When connecting USB storage de-
vice
Repeating is operated in the same way as
for a CD. For details, refer to “Repeating ”
F5-25.
! When connecting iPod
®
Type C audio
Type D audio
Each time you briefly press the “RPT”
button, the mode changes in the following
sequence.
Type C audio:
Type D audio:
NOTE
. The “ALL RPT” indication refers to
the repeat playback of all tracks on the
entire iPod
®
.
. The “SONG RPT” (type C audio)/
“ONE RPT” (type D audio) indication
refers to the repeat playback of a single
track. It repeats the track that is play-
ing.
. When an audiobook is playing, the
mode does not change even if you
press the “RPT” button.
& Random playback
Type C audio*
1
Type D audio*
2
*1: Press and hold the button.
*2: Press the button briefly.
To playback tracks at random, press the
“RDM” button while a track is playing.
Each time you press the button, the mode
changes in the following sequence.
When connecting USB storage device
(type C audio):
When connecting USB storage device
(type D audio):
When connecting iPod
®
(type C audio):
When connecting iPod
®
(type D audio):
NOTE
. The “FOLDER RDM” indication re-
fers to the random playback in the
folders. It randomly repeats all of the
tracks in the folder.
. The “ALL RDM” indication refers to
the random playback in the entire USB
storage device. It randomly repeats all
of the tra cks on the USB storage
device.
. The “ALBUM RDM” indication refers
to the shuffle playback of the album. It
sequentially plays back all of the tracks
on the album.
. The “SONG RDM” indication refers
Audio 5-35
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (214,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-36 Audio
to the shuffle playback on the entire
iPod
®
. It randomly repeats all of the
tracks on the iPod
®
.
. When an iPod
®
is connected, the
tracks are played back at random by
the shuffle function of the iPod
®
. There-
fore, iPod
®
operation may be different
depending on the model of the con-
nected iPod
®
.
. When an audiobook or a podcast is
playing, the mode does not change
even if you press the “RDM” button.
To cancel the random playback mode,
press the “RDM” button and select CAN-
CEL. The “RDM” indication will turn off
and the normal playback mode will re-
sume.
& SCAN (only when connecting
USB storage device) (type C
audio)
Scan is operated in the same way as for a
CD. For details, refer to “Scan (type A, B
and C audio)” F5-27.
NOTE
When an iP od
®
is connected, you
cannot select the SCAN mode.
& Selecting category (only
when connecting iPod
®
)
When the button is pressed briefly,
the iPod
®
menu is displayed.
Each time you turn the “TUNE/TRACK/
CH” dial clockwise, the displayed category
changes in the following sequence. Each
time you turn the dial counterclockwise,
the displayed category changes in the
opposite sequence.
To select the category, press the dial. To
close the iPod
®
menu, press and hold the
button. To return to the previous
screen, briefly press the
button.
& Display selection
Refer to “Display selection (type A, B and
C audio)” F5-27.
! Page scroll
Refer to “Page (track/folder title) scroll”
F5-27.
& Folder selection (only when
connecting USB storage de-
vice)
Refer to “Folder selection” F5-28.
NOTE
When an iPod
®
is connected, y ou
cannot select a folder.
& Setting the playing speed
(only when the audiobook is
playing) (type D audio)
Each time you briefly press (the
“RPT” button) while the audiobook is
playing, the playing speed changes in
the following sequence.
& When the following mes-
sages are displayed
If one of the following messages is
displayed while connecting the USB sto-
rage device/iPod
®
, determine the cause
Black plate (215,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
based on the following information. If you
cannot clear those messages, please
contact your SUBARU dealer.
! When “CHECK DEVICE” is dis-
played
This message is di splayed under the
following conditions.
. When there is a short in the USB bus
. When an unsupported device (for ex-
ample a USB mouse) is connected
. When an unsupported iPod
®
is con-
nected
. When a connected iPod
®
is frozen
. When a transmission malfunction oc-
curs
. When an iPod
®
confirmation malfunc-
tion occurs
. When a HUB c lass US B stor age
device is connected
Disconnect the USB storage device/iPod
®
and check it.
! When “NO USB” is displayed (type
D audio)
This message is di splayed under the
following conditions.
. No USB storage devices/iPod
®
are
connected.
. An incompatible USB storage device/
iPod
®
is connected.
Connect a supported USB storage device/
iPod
®
.
! When “No song” is displayed (type
D audio)
This message is displayed when there are
no playable audio tracks on the connected
USB storage device/iPod
®
. Connect a
USB storage device/iPod
®
that has play-
able audio tracks stored on it.
Audio control buttons (if
equipped)
These buttons are located on the spokes
of the steering wheel. They allow the
driver to control audio functions without
taking his/her hands off the steering
wheel.
& MODE button
Models without Hands-free system
Audio
5-37
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (216,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-38 Audio
Models with Hands-free system
The “MODE” button is used to select the
desiredaudiomode.Eachtimeitis
pressed, the mode changes to the next
one in the following sequence:
Type A and B audio:
Type C and D audio:
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
*3: Only when the device is connected.
! Models with Hands-free system
Press and hold this button if you wish to
immediately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press and hold the button again, the
original sound volume will return and
“MUTE” turns off.
& “ ” and “ ” buttons
Models without Hands-free system
Models with Hands-free system
Black plate (217,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! With radio mode selected
Press the “
” button or “ ” button briefly.
The radio will seek the next preset station
and stop on it.
Press and hold the “
” button or “ ”
button. The radio will seek the next
receivable station and stop on it.
That station’s frequency will be shown on
the audio display.
! With CD mode selected
Press the “
” button to skip forward in the
track order. Press the “
” button to skip
backward in the track order. The track
number will be shown on the audio
display.
When the MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
playing, press and hold the “
” button to
select the next folder. Press and hold the
“
” button to go back to the previous
folder.
! With USB/iPod
®
mode selected
Press the “
” button to skip forward in the
track order. Press the “
” button to skip
backward in the track order. The track
number will be shown on the audio
display.
! With SAT mode selected
Press the “ ” button to skip forward in the
channel order. Press the “
” button to
skip backward in the channel order.
The channel will be shown on the audio
display.
& Volume control buttons
Models without Hands-free system
Models with Hands-free system
Press the “+” button to increase the
volume. Press the “−” button to reduce
the volume.
A number indicating the volume will be
shown on the audio display.
Audio 5-39
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (218,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-40 Audio
& MUTE button (models with-
out Hands-free system)
Press the “ ” button if you wish to
immediately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press the button again, the original
sound volume will return and “MUTE”
turns off.
Bluetooth
®
audio (type C and
D audio)
This function enables you to play back
audio sources from Bluetooth
®
audio
devices. You need to register the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device in the system before
using it.
NOTE
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
registered trademarks of Bl uetooth
SIG, Inc.
& Media format
Bluetooth
®
audio devices cannot be
connected if they are not compatible with
the following Bluetooth
®
profiles.
. A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile)
. AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profile)
& Setting Bluetooth
®
audio
1. Select “BT-A SETUP” by pressing the
“MENU” button (type C audio)/Select “BT
Audio Setup” by operating the “TUNE/
TRACK/CH” dial (type D audio).
2. Perform the following procedure by
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
while “BT-A” (type C audio)/“BT Audio”
(type D audio) is displayed.
NOTE
You cannot set a Bluetooth
®
audio
while driving.
! Registering (pairing) device
1. Select the “PA IR AUDIO” (type C
audio)/“Pair Audio Player” (type D audio)
menu. If a device is already registered,
“MEMORY FULL” is displayed and the
mode changes to the Bluetooth
®
audio
setting mode.
2. After the passkey is shown on the
display, input the passkey into the device.
If you input the correct passkey, “PAIRED”
is displayed and the registering procedure
is finished. If you input an incorrect
passkey, “FAILED” is displayed, the re-
Black plate (219,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
gistering procedure was not successful
and the mode changes to the Bluetooth
®
audio setting mode.
NOTE
After the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK” position, the registered device
is not automatically connected to the
system even if the ignition switch is
turned to the “Acc” or “ON” position.
! Selecting device
1. Select the “SELECT AUDIO” (type C
audio)/“Select Audio Player” (type D
audio) menu. If no devices are registered,
“EMPTY” is displayed an d th e mode
changes to the Bluetooth
®
audio setting
mode.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. If the
device is connected, “SELECTED” is
displayed and the selecting procedure is
finished. If the device cannot be con-
nected, “FAILED” is displayed and the
selecting procedure was not successful.
! Setting passkey
1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu.
After the currently set passkey is dis-
played, a new passkey can be entered.
2. Input the new passkey by operating
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. The new
passkey is displayed, the passkey is
changed and the mode changes to the
Bluetooth
®
audio setting mode.
! Deleting device
1. Select the “DELETE AUDIO” (type C
audio)/“Delete Audio Player” (type D
audio) menu. If no devices are registered,
“EMPTY” is displayed and the mode
changes to the Bluetooth
®
audio setting
mode.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. “DE-
LETED” is displayed and the mode
changes to the Bluetooth
®
audio setting
mode.
& Bluetooth
®
audio operation
NOTE
Depending on the connected device, it
may not activate as per the following
items or not work smoothly.
! How to play back
Press the
button and select the “ BT-
A” (type C audio)/“BT Audio” (type D
audio) mode.
! To select a track from its beginning
Select a track in the same way as for a
CD. Refer to “To select a track from the
beginning” F5-24.
! Repeating
Repeating is operated in the same way as
for a CD. Refer to “Repeating” F5-25.
Each time you briefly press the
button (type C audio)/ button (the
“RPT” button) (type D audio), the mode
changes in the following sequence.
! Random playback
Random playback is operated in the same
way as for a CD. Refer to “Random
playback” F5-26. Each time you press
and hold the
button (type C audio)/
press the
button (the “RDM” button)
briefly (type D audio), the mode changes
in the following sequence.
! Display selection (type C audio)
Select an item to be displayed using the
same way as for a CD. Refer to “Display
selection (type A, B and C audio)” F5-27.
Each time you briefly press the
Audio 5-41
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (220,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-42 Audio
button, the indication changes in the
following sequence.
! Folder selection
Select a folder in the same way as for a
CD. Refer to “Folder selection” F5-28.
Hands-free system (if
equipped)
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, refer to
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
navigation system.
. When selling your vehicle, make
sure that you initialize the Hands-free
system to prevent personal data from
being improperly accessed.
The Hands-free system operates while the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
& Tips for the Hands-free sys-
tem
! Bluetooth
®
It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
in-vehicle equipment through the Blue-
tooth
®
format (wireless) to make a phone
call from the in-vehicle equipment or take
an incoming phone call.
Since the Bluetooth
®
format is wireless, a
connection between the in-vehicle equip-
ment and the cell phone can be made
without placing them in close proximity of
each other. The cell phone can be used
with it left in the breast pocket or bag.
NOTE
. The Hands-free system may not
operate properly under the following
conditions.
– The cell phone is turned off.
– The cell phone is not in the
phone call area.
– The battery of the cell phone has
run down.
– The cell phone is not connected
to the Hands-free system.
– The cell phone is behind the seat
or in the glove box.
– A metal material covers or
touches the cell phone.
. Depending on the type of cell phone
Black plate (221,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
that is used, the screen on the cell
phone may remain illuminated while
the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position. If this occurs, turn the illumi-
nation off by adjusting the cell phone
settings.
. Depending on the setting of the cell
phone, the dial lock function may be
activated after making a call. Deacti-
vate the automatic dial lock function of
the cell phone before using the Hands-
free system.
. Depending on the type of cell phone
that is used, operation and the sound
volume may be different from those of
cell phones currently used.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position during a call, the
call may be disconnected or continued
on the cell phone depending on the
type of cell phone that is used. Note
that operation of the cell phone may be
necessary if the call is continued on the
cell phone.
. Do not speak at the same time as the
other party during a call. If you and the
party speak at the same time, it may be
difficult for the other party to hear your
voice and vice versa. This is normal.
. The receiver sound volume should
be set as low as possible. Otherwise,
the party you are calling may notice an
undesirable echo sound.
. Speak clearly and loudly.
. Your voice may be difficult to be
heard by the party under the following
conditions.
– Driving on a rough road.
– Driving at a high speed.
– Driving with a window open.
– When air from the ventilator
blows directly towards the micro-
phone.
– When the sound coming from the
ventilator is loud.
– When the cell phone is too close
to the microphone.
. The sound quality may degrade due
to the influence of the cell phone that is
connected to the system or the circum-
stances of the Bluetooth network.
. When another Bluetooth
®
device is
simultaneously connected, noise may
be heard in the voice coming from the
hands-free phone.
! Corresponding profiles for the cell
phone
. HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0
. OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1
& Certification for the Hands-
free system
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, includi ng
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
Audio 5-43
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (222,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-44 Audio
may cause harmful interference to
radio commu nications, if it is not
installed and used in accordance with
the instructions. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the u ser is
encouraged to try to correct the inter-
ference by one or more of the following
measures.
. Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
. Connect the equipment into an out-
let on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
. Consult the dealer or an experi-
enced radio/TV technician for help.
. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
. This equipment complies with FCC/
IC radiation exposure limits set forth
for an uncontrolled e quipment and
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C
to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply with-
out maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable
that it should be installed and operated
keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or
more away from person’s body (ex-
cluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
and ankles).
. This transmitter must not be co-
located or operated in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
& Safety precautions
WARNING
. For safety reasons, avoid operat-
ing the cell phone while driving.
. Do not make a phone call while
driving. When you have an in-
coming call, stop the vehicle in a
safe location before taking the
incoming phone call. When you
have to absolutely take a phone
call, tell the caller “I’ll call you
back”. And then call the caller
back after stopping the vehicle in
a safe location.
CAUTION
. Do not leave the cell phone in the
vehicle. The temperature in the
vehicle may become extremely
high and cause a malfunction of
the cell phone.
. When using the cell phone, be
careful not to get it close to the
in-vehicle equipment. Getting it
too close to the in-vehicle equip-
ment may result in deterioration
in tone quality or a poor connect-
ing condition.
. In the frequency band used by
this equipment, along with indus-
trial, scientific and medical
equipment such as a microwave
oven, radio stations (a license is
required) to be used by the
production line in the factory to
identify movable bodies, specific
small power radio stations (a
license is not required) and ama-
teur radio stations (a license is
required) are being operated.
(These three types of radio sta-
tions are hereinafter referred to
as “other radio stations.”) Before
using this equipment, be sure to
check if “other radio stations”
are being operated in the vicinity.
Black plate (223,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
If there is detrimental radio inter-
ference from this equipment to
“other radio stations,” move the
equipment to another location as
soon as possible to avoid radio
interference. The frequency band
used by this equipment is in the
2.4 GHz zone. The FH-SS mod-
ulation is employed as a modula-
tion method. The expected inflict-
ing interference distance is less
than 10 m (33 ft). This equipment
uses a full band and can avoid a
band used by a movable body
identification device.
& Using the Hands-free system
! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
1) OFF hook switch
2) ON hook switch
3) Talk switch
To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
OFF hook switch
. To turn off the
Hands-free mode, press the ON hook
switch
.
! Preparation for using the Hands-
free system
Before using the Hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a cell phone in the
system. Perform the following procedure
to register a cell phone.
1. Press the OFF hook switch
.
2. Select “ENGLISH”/“FRANÇAIS ” by
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
Then “WELCOME!” will be displayed.
3. Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or
the talk switch
.
4. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu.
5. Say the name to be registered.
6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. After
“CAR M_MEDIA” is displayed, a pass key
is displayed.
7. Input the displayed pass key into the
cell phone while “PKY: ****” (type C
audio)/“PASS KEY: ****” (type D audio) is
displayed. If you input the correct pass
key, “PAIRED” is displayed and the
registration procedure is finished. If you
input an incorrect pass key, “FAILED” is
displayed and the registration procedure
was not successful.
NOTE
When the ignition switch is turned to
the “Acc” or “ON” position, the regis-
tered cell phone will be automatically
connected to the system.
! Menu list of the Hands-free system
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to select
a menu, and then press the dial to enter
the selected menu.
Audio 5-45
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (224,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-46 Audio
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
PHONE BOOK*
ADD ENTRY
BY VOICE Adding a new number by voice 5-49
BY PHONE Adding a new number by cell phone 5-49
MANUAL INPUT Adding a new number by inputting manually 5-49
CALL HISTORY Adding a new number from the call history 5-50
GO BACK
LIST NAMES — Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-50
CHANGE NAME — Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-51
SET SPD DIAL/SET
SPEED DIAL
— Registering a speed dial 5-51
DELETE ENTRY — Deleting phonebook data 5-51
DEL SPD DIAL/DE-
LETE SPEED DIAL
— Deleting a registered speed dial 5-51
GO BACK —
REDIAL
DIAL — Redialing 5-52
STORE —
Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call history
memory
5-50
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-51
GO BACK —
CALLBACK
DIAL — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-52
STORE —
Adding a new number stored in the incoming call history
memory
5-50
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-52
GO BACK —
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
Black plate (225,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
SETUP SECURITY
SET PIN Setting a PIN code 5-53
PHBK LOCK*/
PHONE BOOK
LOCK*
Locking the phonebook 5-53
PHBK UNLOCK*/
PHONE BOOK UN-
LOCK*
Unlocking the phonebook 5-53
GO BACK
PHONE SETUP
PAIR PHONE Registering a new cell phone 5-45
SELECT PHONE Selecting a cell phone to be used 5-54
CHANGE NAME Changing the registered name of the cell phone 5-54
LIST PHONES Showing the list of the registered cell phones 5-54
SET PASSKEY Changing the pass key 5-54
DELETE Deleting the registered cell phone 5-55
GO BACK
SYSTEM SETUP
GUIDANCE VOL/
GUIDANCE VOLUME
Setting the volume of the voice guidance 5-55
INITIALIZE Initialization 5-55
SEL LANGUAGE/SE-
LECT LANGUAGE
Selecting the language (using the Hands-free system) 5-55
GO BACK
GO BACK —
*: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
Audio
5-47
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (226,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-48 Audio
! Voice command system
1) OFF hook switch
2) ON hook switch
3) Talk switch
To turn on the voice command system,
press the talk switch
briefly. To turn off
the voice command system, wait for 5
seconds without using the voice command
system.
The commands available for the voice
command system are listed in the follow-
ing chart.
Command
English Français
1 0 (zero, oh) 0 (zéro)
2 1 (one) 1 (un)
3 2 (two) 2 (deux)
4 3 (three) 3 (trois)
5 4 (four) 4 (quatre)
6 5 (five) 5 (cinq)
7 6 (six) 6 (six)
8 7 (seven) 7 (sept)
9 8 (eight) 8 (huit)
10 9 (nine) 9 (neuf)
11 * (star) * (étoile)
12 # (pound) # (carré, dièse)
13 + (plus) + (plus)
14 callback rappel
15 redial recomposer
16 dial by number
composer par nu-
méro
17 dial by name composer par nom
18 phonebook registre
19 setup réglages
20
phone book add
entry
ajouter l’entrée
dans le registre
21
phone book
change name
modifier le nom
dans le registre
22
phone book delete
entry
supprimer l’entrée
du registre
23
phone book list
names
lister les noms du
registre
24
phone book set
speed dial
configurer compo-
sition abrégée pour
le registre
25
phone book delete
speed dial
supprimer compo-
sition abrégée pour
le registre
26 phone book unlock
déverrouiller le re-
gistre
27 cancel annuler
28 help aide
29 repeat répéter
30 go back retourner
31 mute sourdine
32 dial composer
33 previous précédent
34 delete supprimer
35 store enregistrer
36 confirm confirmer
37 phone setup
réglages du télé-
phone
Black plate (227,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
38 security sécurité
39 pair phone
jumeler le télé-
phone
40 change name modifier le nom
41 select phone
sélectionner le tél-
éphone
42 list phones
lister les télé-
phones
43 set pass key
configurer le
passe-partout
44 add entry ajouter l ’entrée
45 delete entry supprimer l’entrée
46 delete speed dial
supprimer compo-
sition abrégée
47 by voice vocalement
48 by phone par téléphone
49 call history historique d’appels
50 set speed dial
configurer compo-
sition abrégée
51 incoming entrant
52 outgoing sortant
53 list names lister les noms
54 set PIN configurer NIP
55 phone book lock
verrouiller le regis-
tre
! Updating phonebook data
NOTE
The maximum number of phonebook
entries that can be registered in the
phonebook is 50.
! Registering by voice
1. Select the “ BY VOICE” menu.
2. Press the talk switch
.
3. Say the phone number to be regis-
tered.
4. Select the “ CONFIRM” menu.
5. Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME ” menu
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
.
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“STORED” is displayed and the mode
changes to the registering speed dial
mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial”
F5-50.
! Registering by phone
1. Select the “ BY PHONE” menu.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“TRANSFER” is displayed.
3. Transfer the data from the cell phone.
For details about transferring the data,
refer to the Owner’s Manual of the cell
phone.
4. Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
.
5. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“STORED” is displayed and the mode
changes to the registering speed dial
mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial”
F5-50.
! Registering by inputting manually
1. Select the “MANUAL INPUT” menu by
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
2. Input the phone number to be regis-
tered.
3. Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
.
4. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
Audio 5-49
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (228,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-50 Audio
5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“STORED” is displayed and the mode
changes to the registering speed dial
mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial”
F5-50.
NOTE
While inputting the phone numbers, if
“GO BACK” (type C audio)/“BS” (type
D audio) is chosen using the “TUNE/
TRACK/CH” dial, the character that was
input last is deleted.
! Registering from call history
1. Select the “ CALL HISTORY” menu.
2. Select “OUTGOING” or “INCOMING”
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
4. Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
.
5. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“STORED” is displayed and the mode
changes to the registering speed dial
mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial”
F5-50.
! Registering from redial
1. Select the “ REDIAL ” menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Select the “ STORE” menu.
4. Select the “ CONFIRM” menu.
5. Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME ” menu
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
.
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“STORED” is displayed and the mode
changes to the registering speed dial
mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial”
F5-50.
! Registering from call back
1. Select the “ CALL BACK” menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Select the “ STORE” menu.
4. Select the “ CONFIRM” menu.
5. Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
.
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“STORED” is displayed and the mode
changes to the registering speed dial
mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial”
F5-50.
! Registering speed dial
1. After registering phonebook data, se-
lect the “SPEED DIAL” menu.
2. Press the preset button (from
to
) to which you want to register the
phone number.
NOTE
If the number to be used is already
registered in speed dial, “OVER-
WRITE?” will be displayed.
! List names function
The voice tags registered in the phone-
book are spoken by using the list names
function. To use the list names function,
perform the following procedure.
1. Select the “LIST NAMES” menu.
2. Choose the registered data by per-
Black plate (229,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
forming either of the following procedures.
– Press the talk switch
.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
3. After “SELECTED” is displayed, you
can choose the following menus.
. “DIAL” to make a phone call
. “CHANGE NAME” to change the name
(voice tag)
. “SET SPD DIAL”/“SET SPEED DIAL”
to set the speed dial
. “DELETE ENTRY” to delete the name
(voice tag) from the phonebook
. “GO BACK” to go back to the menu
mode
NOTE
. After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if
the OFF hook switch
is pushed, the
selected number is called.
. After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if
no operation is performed, the mem-
ories are displayed and voice tags are
spoken. After all memories/voice tags
are displayed/spoken, “END OF LIST”
is displayed and the mode changes to
the “PHONE BOOK” menu mode.
! Changing voice tag
1. Select the “ CHANGE NAME” menu.
2. Select the phone number by perform-
ing either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the voice tag.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (only
after saying the voice tag). Then the
selected phone number/name is dis-
played.
4. Press the talk switch
.
5. Say the new voice tag.
6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“CHANGED” is displayed.
! Set speed dial
1. Select the “SET SPD DIAL”/“SET
SPEED DIAL” menu.
2. Select the phone number by perform-
ing either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the voice tag.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (only
after saying the voice tag).
4. Press the preset button (from
to
) in which you want to register the
phone number.
! Deleting the phonebook data
1. Select the “DELETE ENTRY” menu.
2. Select the phone number by perform-
ing either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/T RACK/CH ”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the voice tag.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“DELETED” is displayed and the selected
phonebook data is deleted.
! Deleting the speed dial
1. Select the “DEL SPD DIAL”/“DELETE
SPEED DIAL” menu.
2. Press the preset button (from
to
) in which you want to delete the
speed dial.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“DELETED” is displayed and the selected
speed dial is deleted.
! Deleting the redial data
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Select the “DELETE” menu.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“DELETED” is displayed and the selected
redial data is deleted.
Audio 5-51
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (230,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-52 Audio
! Deleting the callback data
1. Select the “ CALLBACK” menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Select the “ DELETE” menu.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“DELETED” is displayed and the selected
callback data is deleted.
! Making a phone call
! Making a phone call by saying name
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
2. Press the talk switch
.
3. Say “DIAL BY NAME”.
4. Press the talk switch
again.
5. Say the desired name (voice tag) to be
called.
6. Select the “ DIAL” menu.
! Making a phone call by saying
number
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
2. Press the talk switch
.
3. Say “DIAL BY NUMBER”.
4. Press the talk switch
again.
5. Say the desired phone number to be
called.
6. Select the “ DIAL” menu.
! Making a phone call from speed dial
It is possible to select a phone number
from speed dial registered with the in-
vehicle equipment to make a phone call.
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
2. Press the preset button (from
to
) in which the desired number is
registered.
3. Press the OFF hook switch
.
NOTE
When a preset button for which num-
bers are not registered is pressed, an
error message is indicated on the audio
screen.
! Redial
1. Select the “ REDIAL ” menu.
2. Press the OFF hook switch
.
3. Select the desired number by turning
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
4. Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
– Press the OFF hook switch
.
– Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial,
then select the “DIAL” menu.
! Callback
1. Select the “ CALL BACK” menu.
2. Press the OFF hook switch
.
3. Select the desired number by turning
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
4. Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
– Press the OFF hook switch
.
– Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial,
then select the “ DIAL ” menu.
! Making a phone call from list name
It is possible to select a phone number
from the list name registered with the in-
vehicle equipment to make a phone call.
For details, refer to “List names function”
F5-50.
! Top redial
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
2. Press the OFF hook switch
and
load the outgoing call history.
3. Select the “DIAL” menu.
! Taking a phone call and declining
an incoming call
To take a phone call: Press the OFF
hook switch
.
To put an incoming call on hold: Press
the ON hook switch
briefly.
To decline an incoming call: Press and
hold the ON hook switch
for more
than 1.5 seconds.
Black plate (231,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Ending a call
Press the ON hook switch
.
! Volume control
You can adjust the phone call volume, the
voice volume and the voice guidance
volume. Refer to “Volume control buttons”
F5-39.
! Adjustable level of each volume
Volume Range Initial setting
Phone call 0 to 14 7
Voice 0 to 14 7
Voice guidance 0 to 6
3
& Bluetooth
®
setting
! Security setting
After selecting the “SECURITY” menu,
perform the following procedures.
! Setting PIN code
The PIN code is a 4-digit number and is
used when locking the phonebook.
1. Select the “SET PIN” menu. Then
“CURRENT PIN?” is displayed.
2. Input the current PIN code by perform-
ing either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the number.
3. Select the “ CONFIRM” menu.
4. Input the new PIN code by performing
either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the number.
5. Select the “ CONFIRM” menu.
! Locking the phonebook
1. Select the “PHBK LOC K”/“PHO NE-
BOOK LOCK” menu. Then “CURRENT
PIN?” is displayed.
2. Input the PIN code by performing
either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/T RACK/CH ”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the number.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. If the
inputted PIN code is correct, “LOCKED” is
displayed and the phonebook is locked.
NOTE
While the phonebook is locked, if the
operation restricted menu is selected,
“PHBK LOCK” is displayed.
! Unlocking the phonebook
1. Select the “PHBK UNLOCK”/“PHONE-
BOOK UNLOCK” menu. Then “CUR-
RENT PIN?” is displayed.
NOTE
If the phonebook is not locked, “UN-
LOCK” is displayed and the mode
changes to the security mode.
2. Input the PIN code by performing
either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/T RACK/CH ”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the number.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. If the
inputted PIN code is correct, “UN-
Audio 5-53
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (232,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-54 Audio
LOCKED” is displayed and the phone-
book is unlocked.
! Phone setup
After selecting the “PHONE SETUP”
menu, perform the following procedures.
! Setting pair phone
Refer to “Preparation for using the Hands-
free system” F5-45.
! Selecting phone
To select the registered cell phone for
connecting to the in-vehicle equipment,
perform the following procedure.
1. Select the “SELECT PHONE” menu. If
no cell phones are registered, “EMPTY” is
displayed and the mode changes to the
“PHONE SETUP” mode.
2. Select the cell phone by performing
either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the voice tag.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (only
after saying the voice tag). “SELECTED”
is displayed, the selected cell phone is
connected to the in-vehicle equipment and
the mode changes to the “PHONE SET-
UP” mode.
! Changing the voice tag of the cell
phone
1. Select the “CHANGE NAME” menu. If
no cell phones are registered, “EMPTY” is
displayed and the mode changes to the
“PHONE SETUP” mode.
2. Select the cell phone by performing
either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the voice tag.
3. Register the voice tag. For details,
refer to “Preparation for using the Hands-
free system” F5-45.
! List phones function
The cell phone voice tags saved in the cell
phone list are spoken by using the list
phones function.
1. Select the “LIST PHONES ” menu. If
no cell phones are registered, “EMPTY” is
displayed and the mode changes to the
“PHONE SETUP” mode.
2. Registered cell phones are displayed
on the saved side. While displayed, if the
“TUNE/TRACK/C H” dial is turned, the
next registered cell phone is displayed.
Press the ON hook button
to close the
Hands-free menu.
3. Select a cell ph one by performing
either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/T RACK/CH ”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
.
4. After “SELECTED” is displayed, select
the following menus.
. “SELECT PHONE” to connect the
selected cell phone
. “CHANGE NAME ” to change the voice
tag
. “DELETE” to delete the selected cell
phone from the list
. “GO BACK” to go back to the “PHONE
SETUP” mode
! Setting passkey
1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu.
After the currently set passkey is dis-
played, a new passkey can be entered.
2. Input the new passkey by performing
either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/T RACK/CH ”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the passkey.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. The new
passkey is dis pla yed, the passkey i s
changed and the mode changes to the
“PHONE SETUP” mode.
Black plate (233,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Deleting registered cell phone from
the list
1. Select the “ DELETE” menu.
2. Select a cell phone to be deleted by
performing either of the following proce-
dures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
– Press the talk switch
and say
the voice tag.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. “DE-
LETED” is displayed, the data is deleted
and the mode changes to the “PHONE
SETUP” mode.
! System setup
After selecting the “SYSTEM SETUP”
menu, perform the following procedures.
You can select the following menus only
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
! Setting guidance volume
To set the guidance volume, perform the
following procedure.
1. Select the “GUIDANCE VOL”/“GUI-
DANCE VOLUME” menu.
2. Set the guidance volume by operating
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
! Initializing the registered data
To initialize the registered data, perform
the following procedure.
1. Select the “ INITIALIZE” menu.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. First
“PLEASE WAIT”, then “INITIALIZED” is
displayed. The registered data is initia-
lized and the mode changes to the last
mode.
! Selecting language
To select the language, perform the
following procedure.
1. Select the “SEL LA NGUAGE”/“SE-
LECT LANGUAGE” menu.
2. Select the desired language by oper-
ating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
Screensaver (type D audio)
If the following operations are not per-
formed for more than 30 seconds while
the audio is ON, the screensaver will be
displayed.
. Operate any button or dial
. Shift the shift lever/select lever to the
“R” position
. A cell phone registered in the Hands-
free system is called
If one of the following operation s is
performed, the screensaver turns off and
the operation screen will be displayed.
. A cell phone registered in the Hands-
free system is called
. The update for satellite radio starts.
. The update for satellite radio stops.
If one of the following operation s is
performed, the screensaver turns off.
However, the operation screen will not
be displayed.
. Operate any button or any dial in a
condition other than the following condi-
tions
– Pressing the
button while a
mode other than the CD mode is
selected
– Pressing the volume control buttons
of the audio control buttons
Audio 5-55
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (234,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5-56 Audio
– Pressing the power switch
. Insert a CD (except reloading a CD)
. Connect a USB storage device or an
iPod
®
NOTE
The screensaver is not displayed under
the following conditions.
. While the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK” position
. While the audio is OFF
. While the screen is OFF
. While talking on a cell phone regis-
tered in the Hands-free system
. While setting the audio
. While seek tuning, PTY group tun-
ing, scan tuning or auto-storing while
the FM/AM radio is on.
. While in the category search mode
of the satellite radio
. While the rear view camera is being
used
& Downloading picture
Perform the following procedure to down-
load a picture to be used as screensaver.
1. Connect a USB storage device. Refer
to “Connecting USB stor age device /
iPod
®
” F5-33.
2. Select the “Picture Download” menu
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
For details, refer to “Audio settings (type D
audio)” F5-10.
3. Select the preferred JPEG file by
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
4. Select “Wide” or “Normal” by operating
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
NOTE
. JPEG files that are 10 MB or less can
be saved.
. If the file name is too long, the file
may not be saved.
. Up to two JPEG files can be saved in
the in-vehicle equipment.
. If the aspect ratio of the displayed
picture is 16:9, “Wide” cannot be
selected.
. If the aspect ratio of the displayed
picture is 4:3, “Normal” cannot be
selected.
& Selecting picture
1. Select the “Picture Select” menu by
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. For
details, refer to “Audio settings (type D
audio)” F5-10. If no pictures are saved,
“No Data” is displayed. Press the
button to return to the “Screen Saver”
mode.
2. Select the preferred picture by operat-
ing the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
& Erasing picture
1. Select the “Picture Erase” menu by
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. For
details, refer to “Audio settings (type D
audio)” F5-10. If no pictures are saved,
“No Data” is displayed. Press the
button to return to the “Screen Saver”
mode.
2. Select the preferred picture by operat-
ing the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
to select “OK” to erase the picture or
“Cancel” to cancel the operation.
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2
Dome light .......................................................... 6-2
Cargo area light .................................................. 6-3
Map light............................................................. 6-3
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4
Vanity mirror ....................................................... 6-4
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5
Glove box ........................................................... 6-5
Center console.................................................... 6-5
Overhead console ............................................... 6-6
Rear seat center table (if equipped) ..................... 6-7
Coin tray............................................................. 6-7
Cup holders ......................................................... 6-8
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-8
Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped) ........... 6-8
Bottle holders...................................................... 6-9
Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-9
Cigarette lighter (dealer option) .......................... 6-10
Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-11
Floor mat............................................................ 6-12
Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-13
Coat hook........................................................... 6-13
Cargo area cover (dealer option)...................... 6-14
Using the cover ................................................. 6-14
To remove the cover .......................................... 6-14
To install the cover ............................................ 6-15
Cargo tie-down hooks ....................................... 6-15
Under-floor storage compartment (if
equipped) ........................................................ 6-16
Rear view camera (if equipped)........................ 6-17
How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-18
Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-18
Help line............................................................ 6-19
Interior equipment
6
Black plate (238,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior lights
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off to avoid battery
discharge.
& Dome light
Type A
Type B
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
three positions.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is
opened.
. The doors or the rear gate are un-
locked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated dome light
remains on for several seconds and then
gradually turns off after all doors and the
rear gate are closed.
While the light is illuminated, if any of the
following operations are performed, the
dome light turns off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. All doors and the rear gate are locked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the light
remains on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
Black plate (239,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Cargo area light
1) DOOR
2) OFF
3) ON
The cargo area lig ht s witch has the
following positions.
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear
gate is opened and turns off when the rear
gate is closed.
OFF: The light remains off.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
& Map light
1) Map light switch (lens)
To turn on the map light, push the lens.
To turn it off, push the lens again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off t o avoid battery
discharge.
! Door interlock switch
1) Door interlock switch
Although the map light switches (lenses)
are in the OFF position (manually off), the
map lights can be set to illuminate auto-
matically in conjunction with a door open-
ing, etc. by use of the door interlock
switch. The door interlock switch has the
following positions.
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. However, the lights can be
turned on manually by pushing the map
light switches (lenses).
DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors other than the rear
gate is opened. (The map lights do not
Interior equipment 6-3
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (240,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-4 Interior equipment
illuminate when only the rear gate is
opened.)
. The door s are unl ocked us ing the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated map lights
remain on for several seconds and then
gradually turn off after all doors are
closed. While the lights are on, if any of
the following operations are performed,
the map lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. All doors and the rear gate are locked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the
lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
& Vanity mirror
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
glare.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
Black plate (241,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Storage compartment
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
& Glove box
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
& Center console
The center console box provides a sto-
rage space. In addition, the top of the
console can be used as an armrest.
To use as an armrest:
1. Tip the console top forward from its
vertical position.
2. Push the armrest part of the console
top forward to the desired position. Adjust
the position of the armrest to suit your
Interior equipment 6-5
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (242,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-6 Interior equipment
driving position. Make sure the armrest is
securely retained.
To return the console top to the vertical
position, raise the console top.
CAUTION
Do not step or sit on the armrest,
and do not place heavy objects on it.
The armrest could break, and you
could get hurt.
To use as storage space:
Raise the console top to the vertical
position.
1) Pocket console
The pocket console can be used to store
small items.
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your hand
between the console top and con-
sole box when raising and tipping
the console top.
& Overhead console
To open the console, push on the console
lid lightly and the lid will automatically
open.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is in the sun or
on a warm day, the inside of the
overhead console heats up. Avoid
storing plastic or other heat-vulner-
able or flammable articles such as a
lighter in the overhead console.
Black plate (243,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Rear seat center table (if
equipped)
To use the rear seat center table, pull the
strap up.
The rear seat center table can be used as
a storage space and as rear passenger’s
cup holders.
CAUTION
. Do not step or sit on the rear seat
center table, and do not place
heavy objects on it. The rear seat
center table could break, and you
could get hurt.
. When pulling out or returning the
rear seat center table, make sure
not to pinch fingers or other body
parts.
. Do not use the rear seat center
table while driving.
. When folding down the rear seat-
back, return the rear seat center
table.
& Coin tray
A coin tray is built in the center console.
Interior equipment 6-7
6
Black plate (244,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-8 Interior equipment
Cup holders
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
& Front passenger’s cup holder
CAUTION
Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an accident.
A dual cup holder is built in the center
console, beside the parking brake lever.
The cup ho lder rear partiti on can be
removed and placed on the front partition.
This space can be used to store small
items.
& Rear passenger’s cup holder
(if equipped)
A dual cup holder is located on the rear
seat center table.
Black plate (245,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Bottle holders
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
The bottle holder equipped on each door
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
Accessory power outlets
Power outlet below the climate controls
Power outlet in the center console
Interior equipment
6-9
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (246,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-10 Interior equipment
Power outlet in the cargo area
Accessory power outlets are provided
below the climate controls, in the center
console and in the cargo area. Electrical
power (12V DC) from the battery is
available at any of the outlets when the
ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
You can use an electrical appliance by
connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W.Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not
exceed 120W.
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter plug in the accessory
power outlets.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not
in use.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 120W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
When using appliances con-
nected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120W. Ove rloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters.
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accel-
erator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical
appliance while driving.
& Cigarette lighter (dealer op-
tion)
A cigarette lighter may be installed in
place of an accessory power outlet. The
cigarette lighter assembly is availabl e
from your SUBARU dealer.
The cigarette lighter operates only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”
position.
Black plate (247,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
knob and wait a few moments. It will
automatically spring up when ready for
use.
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp
the lighter by the end with the
heating element. Doing so could
result in inju ry and could also
damage the heating element.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. Do not use non-genuine cigarette
lighter plugs in the socket. Doing
so may cause a short-circuit and
overheating, resulting in a fire.
. If the socket is ever used for a
plug-in accessory such as a cell
phone, that may damage the
portion of the socket ’s internal
mechanism that causes a cigar-
ette lighter plug to “pop out”
after its heating element is
heated. Therefore, do not place
a cigarette lighter plug in a sock-
et that has been used, even once,
to power a plug-in accessory.
Doing so may cause the plug to
stick and overheat, creating a
potential fire hazard.
Ashtray (if equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire on the
cigarette tip may spread to an-
other cigarette butt and start a
fire.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
Interior equipment 6-11
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (248,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-12 Interior equipment
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder. For the locations of the
cup holders, refer to “Cup holders” F6-8.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. When removing the ashtray from
a cup holder, pull the ashtray upwards.
Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to
help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or another narrow-ended
implement.
Floor mat
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
side floor.
The driver’s floor mat should be properly
secured using the built-in grommets, by
placing the grommets over the pins and
pushing them downward.
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-
lent designed with grommets in
the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured
on its retaining pins.
Black plate (249,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
Shopping bag hook
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
more.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
Coat hook
A coat hook is attached to each side of the
cargo area.
CAUTION
. Never hang anything on the coat
hook tha t might obstruct the
driver’s view or that could cause
injury in sudden stops or in a
collision.
. Do not hang items on the coat
hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
more.
Interior equipment 6-13
6
Black plate (250,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-14 Interior equipment
Cargo area cover (dealer op-
tion)
The cargo area cover is pr ovided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover
To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as sh own. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold the cover and guide it back into the
cover housing while it is rewinding.
Install the front cover behind the rear
seatback.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover. Scratches
on the stays could cause leakage
of gas from the stays, which may
result in their inability to hold the
rear gate open.
. If the vehicle is equipped with a
reclining rear seatback feature,
when reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward
so that the cover is not damaged.
& To remove the cover
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Push the button that is next to the right
end of the cover housing.
3. Take it off the retainer.
Black plate (251,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& To install the cover
1. Remove the cover of the retainers by
pryingontheedgewithaflat-head
screwdriver.
2. Insert the projections located on both
ends of the cover housing into the
recesses of the retainers.
WARNING
Make sure to install the cover hous-
ing securely. Otherwise, there is a
risk of being injured.
Cargo tie-down hooks
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-
down hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
storing recesses.
Interior equipment 6-15
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (252,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-16 Interior equipment
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 44
lbs (20 kg) per hook.
Under-floor storage compart-
ment (if equipped)
The storage compartment is located under
the floor of the cargo area, and it can be
used to store small items. To open the lid,
pull the tab up.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lids closed while
driving to red uce the ri sk of
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
Black plate (253,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Rear view camera (if
equipped)
A rear view camera is attached to the rear
gate. When the ignition switch is “ON” and
the shift lever (MT models) or select lever
(AT models) is set to “R”, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear
view image behind the vehicle on the
navigation monitor or the display of the
type D audio (if equipped).
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses
a wide-angle lens, the image on
the monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
. Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, you should
always check the rear view and
the surrounding area with your
eyes and mirrors, and move
backward at a slow speed. Mov-
ing backward only by checking
the rear view image from the
camera could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
Contact y our S UBARU dealer
for an inspection. Continued use
may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle is washed with a
high-pressure washer, d o not
allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry o f water in th e
camera lens may result in con-
densation, malfunction, fire or
electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful removing it.
Otherwise, damage to the camera
may cause a fire or electric
shock. Pour water or lukewarm
water over the camera to remove
mud and ice, and wipe it with a
soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-
mage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
malfunction.
. If the rear view camera is used for
a long time while the engine is
not operated, the battery may
become completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with a
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
dry cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
Interior equipment 6-17
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (254,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-18 Interior equipment
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has hard coating to
help prevent scratches. However, when
washing the vehicle or cleaning the
camera lens, be careful not to scratch
the camera lens. Do not use a washing
brush directly on the camera lens. The
image quality of the rear view camera
may deteriorate.
. Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop vertical lines around
the light source. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
. Under fluorescent light, the display
may f licker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. The image of the rear view camera
may be slightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
& How to use the rear view
camera
When the shift lever or select lever is set
to “R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image from the
vehicle. When the lever is set to other
positions, the image before setting to “R”
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the shift lever or select lever to “R”.
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, the image
of the rear view camera has priority
over other screen displays. Therefore,
while the rear view camera is in opera-
tion, the operations of other screens
are disabled. To operate other screens,
set the shift lever or select lever to a
position other than “R”.
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
side view mirror.
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rearview camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
– An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light shined directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
& Viewing range on the screen
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the r ear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
Range of view
Black plate (255,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Range of view
Image from camera
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
Range of view
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
& Help line
The help line (distance marker and vehicle
width line) is a guide to help you realize
the actual distance from the screen image.
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
6) Vehicle centerline
When the shift lever or select lever is set
to position “R”, the monitor screen dis-
Interior equipment 6-19
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (256,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
6-20 Interior equipment
plays the help lines together with the rear
view image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
. The actual position may be dif-
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual posi-
tion.
! Difference between screen image
and actual road
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading condi-
tions or road conditions.
! When there is an upward slope at the
back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
! When there is a downward slope at
the back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther
thantheactualdistanceasinan
upward slope.
Black plate (257,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Feature of distance marker
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
close behind, distance cannot be correctly
displayed.
Interior equipment 6-21
6
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (13,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2
Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-2
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-3
State emission tes ting (U.S. only)...................... 7-6
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-7
Starting the engine.............................................. 7-7
MT models .......................................................... 7-7
AT models........................................................... 7-8
Stopping the engine............................................ 7-9
Remote engine start system (dealer option)..... 7-9
Starting your vehicle .......................................... 7-10
Remote start safety features ............................... 7-10
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote
start................................................................. 7-10
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start
shutdown......................................................... 7-10
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle ............................................................. 7-11
Service mode ..................................................... 7-11
Remote transmitter programming and
programmable feature option............................ 7-11
System maintenance .......................................... 7-12
Manual transmission.......................................... 7-13
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-14
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-14
Automatic transmission..................................... 7-15
Select lever ........................................................ 7-16
Shift lock function .............................................. 7-17
Selection of manual mode .................................. 7-19
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-20
SPORT mode..................................................... 7-20
Power steering................................................... 7-21
Braking ............................................................... 7-22
Braking tips....................................................... 7-22
Brake system .................................................... 7-22
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-23
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-23
ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-23
ABS warning light.............................................. 7-23
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ............................................................. 7-24
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions ... ....... 7-24
Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-25
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-26
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-27
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models)......................................... 7-27
Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-29
Parking brake .................................................... 7-29
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-29
Hill start assist system (MT models)................ 7-31
Hill start assist warning light.............................. 7-32
Cruise control .................................................... 7-32
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-32
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-33
To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-34
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-34
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-35
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-35
Starting and operating
7
Black plate (260,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-2 Starting and operating
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inappropri ate fuel
additive may cause engine damage.
& Fuel requirements
! Non-turbo models
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
! Turbo models
The engine is designed to operate using
premium unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or
higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is
not available, regular unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON)
or higher may be temporarily used. For
optimum engine performance and drive-
ability, it is required that you use premium
grade unleaded gasoline.
NOTE
Be sure to use premium unleaded
gasoline of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher
for turbo engine models. If other gaso-
line (lower than 91 AKI (95 RON)) is
used, knocking, reduced output and
poor acceleration will result.
! Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
It is normal if your vehicle sometimes
knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or
when you accelerate, but contact your
SUBARU dealer if your vehicle knocks
heavily or persistently even though you
are using a fuel with the specified octane
rating.
! Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Gasoline for California-certified
LEV
If your vehicle was certified to California’s
low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
indicated on the underhood tune-up label,
it is designed to optimize engine and
emission performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
fornia gasoline specifications. Gasoline
sold outside California is permitted to
have higher sulfur levels. It can be used
but it may affect the performance of your
vehicle’s catalytic converter and may
produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell.
SUBARU recommends that you try a
different brand of unleaded gasoline hav-
ing lower sulfur to determine if the problem
is fu el rel ated bef ore returni ng your
vehicle to an authorized SUBARU dealer
for service.
! MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-en-
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light may turn on. If this
happens, contact an authorized SUBARU
dealer for service. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel
used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
Black plate (261,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Gasoline for cleaner air
Your u se of gasoline with detergent
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emi ssion control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) blended fuel may
be used in your vehicle, but should
contain no more than 15% MTBE or 10%
ethanol for the proper operation of your
SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gaso lines,
which ar e designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following description.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AN D if it is accompani ed by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line b efore seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be sure
to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
is not covered under the SUBARU
Limited Warranty.
& Fuel filler lid and cap
! Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
Starting and operating 7-3
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (262,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-4 Starting and operating
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor
at the left of the driver’s seat.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar o bject to discharge any
static electricity that may be present
on your body. If your body is carry-
ing an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1) Open
2) Close
2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
stop the engine and close all
vehicle doors and windows.
Make sure that there are no
lighted cigarettes, open flames
or electrical sparks in the adja-
cent area. Only handle fuel out-
doors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly counter-
clockwise. Do not remove the
cap quickly. Fuel may be under
pressure and spray out of the
fuel filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.
3. Hook the cord that is attached to the
fuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuel
filler lid.
Black plate (263,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop me chanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
. After r efueling, tu rn the cap
clockwise until it clicks to ensure
that it is fully tightened. If the cap
is not secu rely tightened, fuel
may leak out while the vehicle is
being driven or fuel spillage
could occur in the event of an
accident, creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting and your fuel tank
and emis sion control system
may be damaged. It could also
lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank
could cause damage to the en-
gine.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
dicator light” F3-15.
Starting and operating 7-5
7
Black plate (264,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-6 Starting and operating
State emission testing (U.S.
only)
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model
must NEVER be performed on a
single two-wheel dynamometer. At-
tempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
may cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your in spect ion or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi-
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
bia have implemented emission inspec-
tion of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator light (MIL) and an
examination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle
passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
served, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
. A vehicle
fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to a burned out bulb) or
there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
READY” is greater than one. If the
vehicle’s battery has been recently re-
placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
days to reset the readiness monitors and
return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell you r emission
inspector
not to p lace your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
sion damage will result.
Black plate (265,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
state emission testing.
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that the hood and rear gate are
fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning
and indicato r lig hts when th e ign itio n
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
Starting the engine
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 sec-
onds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the starter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
NOTE
It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
culty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
& MT models
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
cessories.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting
Starting and operating 7-7
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (266,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-8 Starting and operating
the engine. The starter motor will only
operate when the clutch pedal is pressed
fully to the floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-12.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly applied, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator peda l and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine s tarts, qu ickly r elease the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this does not start the engine,
turn the ignition switch again to the
“LOCK” position. After waiting for 10
seconds or longer, turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
& AT models
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
cessories.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably “P” position).
The starter motor will only operate when
the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-12.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly applied, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pe dal and turn the ignitio n
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this does not start the engine,
turn the ignition switch again to the
“LOCK” position. After waiting for 10
seconds or longer, turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
Black plate (267,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
While the engine is warming up, make
sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
“N” position and that the parking brake is
applied.
CAUTION
If you need to restart the engine
while the vehicle is moving, shift the
select lever into the “N” position. Do
not attempt to place the select lever
of a moving vehicle into the “P”
position.
Stopping the engine
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steer-
ing an d braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the steering lock, causing
the steering wheel to lock.
Remote engine start system
(dealer option)
WARNING
. Do not remote start a vehicle in
an enclosed environment (e.g., in
a closed garage). Prolonged op-
eration of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of Carbon
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly start-
ing the engine.
Starting and operating 7-9
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (268,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-10 Starting and operating
& Starting your vehicle
The remote control start system is acti-
vated by pressing the “
” button twice
within 3 seconds on your remote control
transmitter. The system will check certain
pre-conditions before starting, and if all
safety parameters are correct, the engine
will start within 5 seconds. While the
vehicle is operating via remote engine
start, the vehicle’s power window features
will be disabled. Also, the system has a
timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if
you do not operate the vehicle. Press and
hold the “
” button for 2 seconds again to
turn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s starter
cranks but does not start or starts and
stalls, the remote engine start system will
power off then attempt to start the vehicle
an additional four times. If the vehicle fails
to start after the additional attempts, the
remote engine start system will abort and
return to a non-activated state.
& Remote start safety features
For safety and security re asons, the
system will fail to start and beep the horn
twice or shut down the engine during
remote start operation if any of the
following conditions occur.
. The brake pedal is pressed before the
vehicle ignition switch is turned “on”.
. The key was already in the ignition
switch.
. The engine hood is opened.
. The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
reached a level over 3,000 rpm.
. The alarm is triggered by opening a
door or the rear gate.
NOTE
. The security indicator light on the
dashboard will stop flashing while
under remote engine start operation,
but the vehicle is still protected.
. If the vehicle is entered during
remote engine start operation, the
security system wil l not record the
entry in the alarm history.
& Entering the vehicle while it
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless entry system . If the vehicle’s
doors are unlocked manually using the
key, the vehicle’s alarm system will trigger
and the remote engine start system will
turn off. Inserting the key into the ignition
switch and turning it to the “ON” position or
pressing the unlock button “
” on the
remote keyless entry transmitter will dis-
arm the alarm system. Refer to “Alarm
system” F2-14.
2. Enter the vehicle. Do not depress the
brake pedal.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn to the “ON” position. If the ignition
switch is accidentally turned to the
“START” position, the system’s “starter
anti-grind” feature will prevent the starter
from re-cranking.
4. Depress the brake pedal. The remote
starter disengages, the vehicle’s power
window features are re-enabled and the
vehicle will operate normally.
& Entering the vehicle follow-
ing remote engine start shut-
down
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
Black plate (269,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
ately following remote engine start shut-
down.
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling
the interior of the vehicle
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-
perature controls to the desired setting
and operation. After the system starts the
vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
& Service mode
In service mode, the remote start function
is temporarily disabled to prevent the
system from unexpectedly starting the
engine while being serviced.
! To engage the service mode
Turn the igni tion swi tch to t he “ON”
position, depress and hold the brake
pedal, then press and release the “
”
button on the remote control transmitter
three times. The system will pause for 1
second and then flash the turn signal
lights and honk the horn three times
indicating that the system is in service
mode. When attempting to activate the
remote start system while i n service
mode, the turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will honk two times and will not
start.
! To disengage the service mode
Turn the i gnition switch to the “ON”
position, depress and hold the brake
pedal, then press and release the “
”
button on the remote control transmitter
three times. The system will pause for 1
second and flash the turn signal lights 1
time indicating that the system has exited
service mode.
NOTE
When taking your vehicle in for service,
it is recommended that you inform the
service personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with a remote control start
system.
& Remote transmitter program-
ming and programmable fea-
ture option
New transmitters can be programmed to
the engine starter system in the event that
remote transmitters are lost, stolen or
damaged. The remote engine start system
also has one programmable feature that
can be adjusted for user preference.
The remote engine starter system can be
programmed to either make an audible
horn chirp upon remote start activation or
not. Remote transmitter programming and
feature programming can be adjusted
using the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain opened throughout the
entire process).
2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignition
switch and turn to the “ON” position.
3. Locate the small black programming
button behind the fuse box cover, on the
driver’s side left under the dashboard
panel.
4. Press and hold the black programming
button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will
honk and the turn signal lights will flash
three times to indicate that the system has
entered programming mode. At this point
you can proceed to either step 5 or step 6.
5. To program a r emote transmitter:
press and release the “
” button on each
transmitter. The horn will honk and the
turn signal lights will flash one time to
indicate a successf ul transmitter learn
each time the “
” button is pressed. You
can program up to eight transmitters.
6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps
ON/OFF: press and release the brake to
toggle the feature. The horn will chirp and
the turn signal lights will flash one time to
indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are
“OFF”. The horn will honk and the turn
signal lights will flash 2 times to indicate
Confirmation Horn Chirps are “ON”.
Starting and operating 7-11
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (270,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-12 Starting and operating
Pressing the brake pedal repeatedly will
toggle the feature ON or OFF each time.
7. To exit the remote transmitter and
feature programming mode, turn the igni-
tion switch to the “LOCK” position, remove
the key from the ignition switch and test
operation of the remote transmitter(s) and
horn confirmation feature.
& System maintenance
! Changing the remote control bat-
teries
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; chil dren could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
CR-1220) supplied in your remote control
should last approximately 3 years, de-
pending on usage. When the batteries
begin to weaken, you will notice a
decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote control batteries.
1. Carefully pry the remote control halves
apart using a small flat-head screwdriver.
Black plate (271,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and slide the white
plastic battery holder out from under the
battery tab releasing the batteries. Re-
move the old batteries and replace with
new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign
on the old batteries before removing them
to ensure that the new batteries are
inserted properly (battery “+” should be
pointed away from the transmitter circuit
board on both batteries).
3. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, then test the remote control.
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of I C
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Manual transmission
The manual transmission is a fully syn-
chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-
verse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to
reverse gear, first return the shift lever to
the neutral position then shift into reverse
gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
WARNING
. Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch pedal depressed or with
the shift lever in the neutral
Starting and operating 7-13
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (272,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-14 Starting and operating
position. Engine braking has no
effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
release the clutch pedal) sud-
denly when starting the vehicle.
By doing so, the vehicle might
unexpectedly accelerate or the
transmission could malfunction.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmis-
sion to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.
& Shifting speeds
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel econ-
omy and v ehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
4th to 5th 45 (72)
! Maximum allowable speeds
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each gear.
The tachometer’s needle will enter the red
area if these speeds are exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden
acceleration is required, the vehicle
should not be driven with the tachometer’s
needle inside the red area. Failure to
observe this preca ution can lead to
excessive engine wear and poor fuel
economy.
mph (km/h)
1st 30 (49)
2nd 51 (83)
3rd 73 (118)
Never exceed the posted speed limit.
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the maximum al-
lowable speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
quence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
& Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Black plate (273,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downg rades, downshift the
transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as
necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
Automatic transmission
The automatic transmission is electroni-
cally controlled and provides 4 forward
speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a
manual mode and a SPORT mode.
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position
ONLY after the vehicle is comple-
tely stopped. Shifting while the
vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is set or when
chocks are used in the wheels.
This may cause the automatic
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Avoid shifting from one of the
forward driving positions into the
“R” position or vice versa until
the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may
cause damage to the transmis-
sion.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Avoid parking
for a long time with the select
lever in any other position as
doing so could result in a dead
battery.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, the automatic transmis-
sion wi ll upshift at higher engine
speeds than when the coolant tempera-
ture is sufficiently high in order to
shorten the warm-up time and improve
driveability. The gearshift timing will
automatically return to the normal tim-
ing after the engine has warmed up.
. Immediately after ATF (automatic
transmission fluid) is replaced, y ou
may feel that the automatic transmis-
sion operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from invalidation of data
which the on-board computer has
collected and stored in memory to
Starting and operating 7-15
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (274,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-16 Starting and operating
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate timings for the cur-
rent condition of your vehicle. Opti-
mized shifting will be restored as the
vehicle continues to be driven for a
while.
& Select lever
: Shifting is possible with the brake pedal
depressed.
: Shifting is possible whether the brake
pedal is depressed or not. However,
while the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position, shifting is not possible
if the brake pedal is not depressed.
Depress the brake pedal and move the
select lever.
: Shifting is possible whether the brake
pedal is depressed or not.
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for
using “SPORT” mode or manual mode.
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is me-
chanically locked to prevent the vehicle
from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the
parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
the vehicle completely then move the
lever to the “R” position.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “LOCK” position, movement of the
select lever from the “N” position to the “R”
position is possible for a limited time
period by depressing the brake pedal,
and then it becomes impossible. For
details, refer to “Shift lock function” F7-17.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine.
In this position, the transmission is neutral
and the wheels and transmission are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even on
the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. During coasting, there is no
engine braking effect.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in-
creased.
NOTE
If the select lever is in the “N” position
when you stop the engine for parking,
you may not subsequently be able to
move it to the “R” or “P” position. If
this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. You will then be able
to move the select lever to the “P”
position. For details, refer to “Shift lock
function” F7-17.
Black plate (275,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into
a suitable gear according to the vehicle
speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
When you release the pedal, the transmis-
sion will return to the original gear posi-
tion.
To use the “SPORT” mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate.
To use the manual mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate
then move it toward the “+” or “−” end.
! While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to
4th gear is prevented from taking place
when the accelerator pedal is released.
This minimizes the chance of subsequent
downshifting to a lower gear when accel-
erating again. This prevents repeated
upshifting and downshifting, resulting in
smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd
or 1st gear, depending on the way the
accelerator pedal is pressed to accel-
erate the vehicle again.
! While going down a hill
When you are descending a hill or any
other slope in the “SPORT” mode and you
apply the brakes, the transmission may
downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depending on
how hard you depress the brake pedal,
causing engine braking to work. Reacce-
leration for a short time will cause the
transmission to upshift normally.
NOTE
. A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift
will not occur at spee ds above 5 0
mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd auto-
matic down shift will not occur at
speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h).
. Automatic downshifts may occur
even when driving on a level road
depending on conditions, such a s
how hard you depress the brake pedal.
& Shift lock function
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pe dal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to an y other position
before the brake pedal is depressed.
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
operate the select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the key from the “Acc” position to the
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition key cylinder.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK” position while the select lever is in
the “N” position, the select lever may not
be moved to the “P” position after a period
of time. Therefore, move the select lever
to the “P” position with the brake pedal
depressed soon after the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position.
! Shift lock release
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the brake pedal d e-
pressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
Starting and operating 7-17
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (276,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-18 Starting and operating
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” F7-18.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:
Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
tion switch in the “Acc” position, move the
select lever to the “R” or “P” position with
the brake pedal depressed.
If you must perform the above procedure,
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-18.
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Remove the shift lock cover using a
flat-head screwdriver. The shift lock re-
lease button is located under the shift lock
cover.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the shift lock
cover, wrap the tip of the flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth
before removing the cover.
3. While depressing the brake pedal,
insert the screwdriver into the hole, press
the shift lock release button using the
screwdriver, and then move the select
lever.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
as soon as possible.
Black plate (277,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Selection of manual mode
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the select lever twice in rapid succes-
sion.
. The transmission automatically se-
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid becomes too high,
the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light will
illuminate and upshifts to 4th gear will
not be possible. Immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and let the
engine idle until the warning light turns
off.
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the manual gate then move it to
the “+” end or “−” end of the manual gate
to select manual mode.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the
manual gate.
Type A
Type B
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
Starting and operating 7-19
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (278,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-20 Starting and operating
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear. The upshift and downshift
indicators show when a gear shift i s
possible. When the upshift indicator “
”
is illuminated, upshifting is possible. When
the downshift indicator “
” is illuminated,
downshifting is possible. When both in-
dicators are illuminated, upshifting and
downshifting are both possible. When the
vehicle sto ps (for example, at traffic
signals), the downshift indicator turns off.
Gear shifts can be performed using the
select lever.
Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly
pushing the select lever toward the “+”
end of the manual gate.
Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly
pulling the select lever toward the “−”
end of the manual gate.
& Driving tips
. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
from a standstill (safely and easily) by first
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
mode.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Always apply the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade using the “D”
position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
problem.
& SPORT mode
SPORT mode is used when power is
needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill
driving. To select this mode, move the
select lever from the “D” position to the
manual gate.
Black plate (279,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Type A
Type B
When selected, the SPORT mode indica-
tor light on the combination meter will turn
on.
To desele ct SPO RT mode, move the
select lever to the “D” position or select
manual mode.
To subsequently reselect SPORT mode,
move the select lever to the “D” position
and from there to the manual gate.
In this mode, the transmission shifts up at
higher vehicle speeds and shifts down
more responsively than in normal mode.
Power steering
The power steering system operates only
when the engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system fails to
function, you can steer but it will take
much more effort.
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
fully locked position left or right for
more than 5 seconds. This may
damage the power steering pump.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started
and before it has warmed up, you may
hear a noise coming from areas adja-
cent to the power steering pump which
is located at the right-front area of the
engine compartment. This is normal
and does not indicate a power steering
system problem.
Starting and operating 7-21
7
Black plate (280,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-22 Starting and operating
Braking
& Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To
prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get
stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system
! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has two separate circuit
brake systems. Each circuit works diag-
onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of
the brake system should fail, the other half
of the system still works.
If one circuit fails, the brake pedal will go
down much closer to the floor than usual
and you will need to press it down much
harder. And a much longer distance will be
needed to stop the vehicle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
turn off the engine while driving because
that will turn off the brake booster, result-
ing in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to push the pedal much harder
than normal and the braking distance will
increase.
! Brake assist system
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the b rake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. Even if they occur,
they do not indicate any malfunctions,
Black plate (281,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
and the brake assist system is operat-
ing properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener-
ates a greater braking force.
. You might hear clicking (knocking)
sounds around brake pedal.
& Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle checked by
your SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
wheels which may occur during sudden
braking or braking on slippery road sur-
faces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability
caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the
vehicle speed is below approximately 6
mph (10 km/h).
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving a vehicle with the
ABS system could easily lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS system does not always
decrease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS
system than one without. When
driving under these conditions,
therefore, reduce your speed and
leave ample distance from other
vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS system
operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure.
Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
& ABS system self-check
Just after the vehicle is started, you may
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
to when the ABS operates, and you may
also hear the sound of the ABS working
from the engine compartment. This is
caused by an automatic functional test of
the ABS system being carried out and
does not indicate any abnormal condition.
& ABS warning light
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-19.
Starting and operating 7-23
7
Black plate (282,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-24 Starting and operating
Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD) system
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS system and uses some of the ABS
system’s components to perform its func-
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
ing force. If any of the ABS components
used by the EBD system malfunction, the
EBD system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& Steps to take if EBD system
malfunctions
Type A
Type B
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning l ight illuminate simultan eously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the
conventional braking system will still func-
tion. However, the rear wheels will be
more prone to locking when the brakes
are applied harder than usual and the
vehicle’s motion may therefore become
somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat location.
2. Shut down the engine, apply th e
parking brake, and then restart the engine.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
F11-23.
Black plate (283,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive c arefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light illuminated is dan-
gerous. This indicates your brake
system may not be working
properly. If the light remains on,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving a vehicle with the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-cov-
ered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control s ystem is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery sur-
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from your
vehicle, have an inspection of
that system performed by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the sam e for all
four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
– Use only the specified tem-
porary spare tire to replace a
flat tire. With a temporary
spare tire, the effectiveness
of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
Starting and operating 7-25
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (284,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-B" EDITED: 2015/ 12/ 8
7-26 Starting and operating
trol syst em is reduced and
this should be taken into ac-
count when driving the vehi-
cle in such a condition.
. If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system may not operate cor-
rectly.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Contro l
system helps prevent unstable
vehicle motion such as skidding
using control of the brakes and
engine power. Do not turn off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem unless it is absolutely ne-
cessary. If you must turn off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully accord-
ing to the road surface condition.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is shown by
flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vation of this function is shown by flashing
the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light.
NOTE
. The following conditions occur
when the Vehicle D ynamics Control
system operates. However, this is nor-
mal.
– Slight twitching of the brake
pedal is felt.
– The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
– An operating sound from the
engine compartment is heard
briefly when st arting the e ngin e
and when driving off after starting
the engine.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt
when driving off after starting the
engine.
. In the following circumstances, the
vehicle may be less stable than it feels
to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control System may therefore operate.
Such operation does not indicate a
system malfunction.
– On gravel-covered or rutted
roads
– On unfinished roads
– When the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire. Failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
system monitor
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light” F3-22 and “Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3-
23.
Black plate (285,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch
Pressingtheswitchtodeactivatethe
Vehicle Dynamics Control system can
facilitate the following operations:
. Standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. Extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When the switch is pressed during engine
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light on the combination
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will be deactivated and the
vehicle will behave like a model not
equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system. When the switch is pressed
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator light turns off.
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
deactivated, traction and stability en-
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is unavailable. Therefore
you should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem will be activated automatically
when the engine is started.
. If the switch is held down for 10
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any fur ther pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and restart the en-
gine.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, part of
the brake control system is still active.
When the system is activated, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light illuminates.
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
Type A
Type B
Starting and operating
7-27
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (286,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-28 Starting and operating
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a
sharp object).
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates w hile driving, never
brake suddenly and keep drivi ng
straight ahead while gradually redu-
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on t he tire
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures increase
accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
cool thoroughly before a djusting
their pressures to t he standard
values shown on the tire placard.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-29.
The tire pressure monitoring system
does not function when the vehicle
is stationary. After adjusting the tire
pressures, increase the vehicle
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
to start the TPMS re-checking of the
tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
low pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately 1 minute. This indicates the
TPMS is unable to monitor all four
road wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for tire
and sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
Do not inject any ti re liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking for
approximately 1 minute, promptly
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
CAUTION
. Do not place metal film or any
metal parts in the cargo room.
This may cause poor reception of
the signals from the tire pressure
sensors, and the tire pressure
monitoring system will not func-
tion properly.
. FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Black plate (287,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Parking your vehicle
& Parking brake
To set the parking brake, depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold it down until
the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.
To release the parking brake, pull the lever
up slightly, press the release button, then
lower the lever while keeping the button
pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the
engine is ru nning, the brake system
warning light illuminates. A fter starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to “Brake system warning light” F3-
20.
CAUTION
Never drive while the parking brake
is set because this will cause un-
necessary wear on the brake lin-
ings. Before starting to drive, always
make sure that the parking brake
has been fully released.
& Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following procedure.
. Apply the parking brake firmly.
. For MT models, put the shift lever in
the “1” (1st) position when on an upgrade
or the “R ” (Reverse) position when on a
downgrade.
. For AT models, put the select lever in
the “P” (Park) position.
. When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel as follows.
Starting and operating 7-29
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (288,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-30 Starting and operating
When the vehicle is facing uphill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the
curb.
When the vehicle is facing downhill, the
front wheels should be turned into the
curb.
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do not park t he vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
. Always set the parking b rake
firmly when parking your vehicle.
Never rely on the transmission
alone to hold the vehicle.
. If your vehicle has a front under-
spoiler and rear underspoiler (if
equipped), pay attention to
blocks and other obstructio ns
on the ground when parking.
The underspoilers could be da-
maged by contact with them.
Black plate (289,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Hill start assist system (MT
models)
CAUTION
The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents when
the vehicle is parked on a slope, be
sure to firmly set the parking brake.
When setting the parking brake,
make sure that the vehicle remains
stationary when the clutch pedal is
released.
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make starting on an uphill grade easier.
On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal
is depressed while the brake pedal is also
depressed, braking power is maintained
temporarily by the Hill start assist system
after the brake pedal is released. The
driver is therefore able to start the vehicle
the same way as on a level grade, just
using the clutch and accelerator pedal.
The Hill start assist system does not
operate when the vehicle is facing down-
hill. And the Hill start assist system may
not operate on slight grades.
When starting in reverse and using the Hill
start assist system, a braking effect may
be felt even after the brake pedal has
been released. However, this braking
effect should disappear once the clutch
pedal is released.
A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle
begins to move forward after being re-
versed.
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
pressing the brake pedal again.
Starting and operating 7-31
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (290,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-32 Starting and operating
& Hill start assist warning light
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light (MT
models)” F3-21.
Cruise control
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal. It is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions. This
may cause loss of vehicle control.
. Driving up or down a steep grade
. Driving on slippery or winding
roads
. Driving in heavy traffic
. Towing a trailer
NOTE
. If you press the “CRUISE” main
switch button while turning the ignition
switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
tion is deactivated and the cruise
control indicator light flashes. To re-
activate the cruise control function,
turn the ignition switch back to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position.
. Make sure the “ CRUISE ” main
switch is turned off when the cruise
control is not in use to avoid uninten-
tionally setting the cruise control.
& To set cruise control
1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch but-
ton.
Black plate (291,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Type A
Type B
The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Push the “SET/COAST” button and
release it. Then release the accelerator
pedal.
Type A
Type B
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
light on the combination meter will illumi-
nate.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle wi ll return to t he
previous cruising speed.
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
Starting and operating 7-33
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (292,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
7-34 Starting and operating
. Push the “CANCEL” button.
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).
WARNING
For AT models, do not place the
select lever in the “N” position while
driving. If the select lever is shifted
into the “N” position, cruise control
can be canceled but the engine
brake will no longer work. This
could result in an accident.
The cruise control set indicator light on the
combination meter turns off when the
cruise control is canceled.
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled, push the
“RES/ACC” button. The vehicle will return
to the original cruising speed automati-
cally and the cruise control set indicator
light on the combination meter will illumi-
nate.
NOTE
If the vehicle speed has decreased
below approximately 20 mph (32
km/h), the previously set cruising
speed is canceled completely and
resetting of the cruising speed is
required.
& To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Push the “CRUISE” main switch button
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
& To change the cruising speed
! To increase the speed (by button)
Push the “RES/ACC” button and hold it
until the vehi cle rea ches the desired
speed. Then, release the button. The
vehicle speed at that moment will be
memorized and treated as the new set
speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
Black plate (293,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
by pressing the “RES/ACC” button quickly.
! To increase the speed (by accel-
erator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Push the “SET/COAST” button once.
Now the desired speed is set and the
vehicle will keep running at that speed.
NOTE
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the but ton is
pushed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the
cruise control system unit regards this
operation as that intended to decrease
the vehicle speed.
! To decrease the speed (by button)
Push the “SET/COAST” button and hold it
until the vehicle re aches the desired
speed. Then, release the button. T he
vehicle speed at tha t moment will be
memorized and treated as the new set
speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressing the “SET/COAST” button quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the “SET/COAST”
button once. Now the desired speed is set
and the vehicle will keep running at that
speed.
& Cruise control indicator light
Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
F3-24.
& Cruise control set indicator
light
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
F3-25.
Starting and operating 7-35
7
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
New vehicle break-in driving – the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5
On-road and off-road driving.............................. 8-6
Winter driving...................................................... 8-8
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8
Driving on snowy and icy roads ......................... 8-10
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-11
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-11
Tire chains......................................................... 8-11
Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-12
Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rails (if equipped) ...................................... 8-14
Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped)............ 8-15
Trailer hitch (dealer option)............................... 8-16
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-16
When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-18
Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-18
Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-18
Maximum load limits.......................................... 8-18
Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-21
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-22
Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-23
Driving tips
8
Black plate (298,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km)
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoi d star ting suddenly an d rapi d
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braki ng, except in an
emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to an overhauled engine, newly
mounted engine or when brake pads or
brake linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save
fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the f ront and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxi de, a c olorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoi d remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Black plate (299,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the exhaust
system, you may hear a crackling
sound coming from the exhaust sys-
tem for a short time after the engine
has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
Catalytic converter
Turbo models
Non-turbo models
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
ter:
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or in complete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.,
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
Driving tips 8-3
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (300,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-4 Driving tips
operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-
formed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-2.
. Comply with all regulations and re-
quirements of each country.
Black plate (301,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Driving tips for AWD models
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – ove rconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive model could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing a tire, you must
use a tire that is of the same size,
circumference, construction,
brand (tread pattern), speed sym-
bol and load index as the original
tires listed on the tire placard.
Using tires of other sizes, cir-
cumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride,
handling, braking, speedometer/
odometer calibration, and clear-
ance between the body and tires.
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control.
. You must install four tires that are
of the same size, circumference,
construction, manufacturer,
brand (tread pattern), degree of
wear, speed symbol and load
index. Mixing tires of other sizes,
circumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride ,
handling, braking and speed-
ometer/odometer calibration. It
also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD models
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
By shifting power between the front and
rear whee ls, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during acceleration
and added engine braking force during
deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind:
. An AWD model is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
Driving tips 8-5
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (302,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-6 Driving tips
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recom-
mended tire pressure is provided on the
tire placard, which is located under the
door latch on the driver’s side.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle in
hard driving conditions such as steep hills
or dusty roads will necessitate more
frequent replacement of engine oil, brake
fluid and transmission oil than that speci-
fied in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detail information, refer to “Towing”
F9-14.
On-road and off-road driving
WARNING
. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seat belt. You the driver and
all your passengers should fas-
ten the seatbelts before starting
to drive in order to minimize the
chance of serious injury or death.
. Do not make sharp turns and
quick maneuvers unless abso-
lutely unavoidable. Such actions
are dangerous as you may lose
control, possibly resulting in a
rollover which could cause death
or serious injury.
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Whenever strong crosswinds are
present, slow down sufficiently
to maintain control of your vehi-
cle. Remember that your vehicle,
with its higher profile and center
of gravity, is more likely to be
affected by crosswinds than or-
dinary passenger cars.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive model could easily
lead to a serious accident.
Your vehicl e is classi fied as a utility
vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher
ground clearance which enables them to
be used for wide applications including off-
road driving. But please keep in mind that
your vehicle is neither a conventional off-
road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A
higher center of gravity in relation to the
tread width as compared with ordinary
passenger cars makes vehicles of this
type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility
vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
over rate than other types of vehicles. The
high ground clearance of this vehicle is a
real advantage, giving you a better view of
the road and allowing you to anticipate
problems earlier. However, remember that
your utility vehicle is not designed for high-
speed cornering comparable to ordinary
passenger cars a nd that your vehicle
could roll over if you make a sharp turn
at high speed.
If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain
Black plate (303,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
common sense precautions such as those
in the following list should be taken.
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
with your fingers and thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the
stream bed for firmness and ensure that
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
and cross the stream without stopping.
The water should be shallow enough that
it does not reach the vehicle’s under-
carriage. Water entering the engine air
intake or the exhaust pipe or water
splashing onto electrical parts may da-
mage your vehicle and may cause it to
stall. Never attempt to drive through
rushing water; regardless of its depth, it
can wash away the ground from under
your tires, resulting in possible loss of
traction and even vehicle rollover.
. Always check your brakes for effec-
tiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat
that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after engine
stops. This could create a fire hazard.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
could be thrown around in the vehicle and
cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity and make it more prone
to tip over.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the shift lever/
select lever back and forth between “1”/
“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st. For AT models, refer to
“Selection of manual mode ” F7-19.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
road driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
Driving tips 8-7
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (304,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-8 Driving tips
. Frequent driving of an AWD model
under hard-drivi ng conditions such as
rough roads or off roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of engine oil,
brake fluid and transmission oil than that
specified in the maintenance schedule
described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”.
Remember that damage done to your
SUBARU while operating it off-road and
not using common sen se pr ecaution s
such as those listed above is not eligible
for warranty coverage.
Winter driving
& Operation during cold
weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check th e battery and cables. Cold
temperatures r educe batte ry capaci ty.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a suitable grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Heavy summer oil will
cause harder starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and after-
wards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid Con-
centration
Freezing Temperature
30% 10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100%
−498F(−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the washer tank with a fluid with a
different concentration from the one used
Black plate (305,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
previously, purge the old fluid from the
piping between t he washer tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
thepipingistoolowfortheoutside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the washer tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
While war min g up the v ehi cl e be fore
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
Do not use the parking brake when
parking for long periods in cold weather
since it could freeze in that position.
Instead, observe the following.
1. Place the shift lever in the “1” or “R”
position for manual transmission models,
or place the select lever in the “ P” position
for automatic transmission models.
2. Use chocks under the tires to prevent
the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or
when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked
after use on roads heavily covered with
snow, or has been left parked during a
snowstorm, icing may develop on the
brake system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow or ice
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,
being careful not to damage the disc
brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-
ness.
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed fo r this purpose. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
Driving tips 8-9
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (306,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-10 Driving tips
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on snowy and icy
roads
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
hances your v ehicle’s braking perfor-
mance on snowy and icy ro ads. Fo r
information on braking on slippery sur-
faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)” F7-23 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control system” F7-25.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’sintakesystemandmay
hinder the airflow, which could re-
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blades are fr ozen t o the
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure.
. To thaw the windshield wiper blades,
use the defroster with the airflow selection
in “
” and the temperature set for
maximum warmth until the wiper blades
are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate
control” F4-1.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog-
ger and deicer” F3-44.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the
rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger
and deicer” F3-44.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow set to “
” and the
temperature control dial set for maximum
warmth. After the windshield gets warmed
enough to melt the frozen snow on it,
wash it away using the windshield washer.
Refer to “Washer” F3-35.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flashers to alert other drivers.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-5.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freez-
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that
are suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During hi gh-speed driving, non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
Black plate (307,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
& Snow tires
WARNING
. When replacing original tires with
winter (snow) tires, make sure
you use only tires of the same
size, circumference, construc-
tion, brand (tread pattern), speed
symbol and load index as the
original tires listed on the tire
placard. Using tires of other sizes
and constructions may affect
speedometer/odometer calibra -
tion and clearance between the
body and tires. It also may be
dangerous and lead to loss of
vehicle control.
. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, circum-
ference, construction, manufac-
turer, brand (tread pattern), de-
gree of wear, speed symbol and
load index. Mixing tires of other
sizes or constructions may result
in severe mechanical damage to
the drive train of your vehicle and
may affect ride, handling, braking
and speedometer/odometer cali-
bration. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” as original equipment, which are
designed to provide an adequate measure
of traction, handling and braking perfor-
mance in year-round driving. In winter, it
may be possible to enhance performance
through use of tires designed specifically
for winter driving conditions.
When you choose to install winter tires on
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
size and type. You must install four winter
tires that are of the same size, construc-
tion, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
& Tire chains
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of
clearance between the tires and
vehicle body.
NOTE
Use of another type of traction device
(such as spring chains) may be accep-
table if use on your vehicle is recom-
mended by the device manufacturer,
taking into account tire size and road
conditions. Follow the device manufac-
turer’s instructions, especially regard-
ing maximum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
Driving tips 8-11
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (308,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-12 Driving tips
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with
a traction device. Overconfidence be-
cause you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
If your vehicle i s an AT model, for
information about holding the transmission
in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
manual mode” F7-19.
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback or in the cargo
area. Doing so may result in serious
injury in the event of a sudden stop,
sharp turn or an accident.
WARNING
. Never stack luggage or o ther
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to t he floor as
possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or the
driveability of your vehicle may
be adversely affected. This could
result in loss of control and
cause personal injury. Also, over-
loading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
Black plate (309,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle capacity weight
The load capacit y of y our vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The certification label attached to the
driver ’s side doorjamb shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage and
any optional equipment. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation.
Driving tips 8-13
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (310,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-14 Driving tips
The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual
weight of your vehicle – including standard
equipment, fluids, emergency tools and
spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle
capacity weight.
In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting yo ur ve hicl e on a
vehicle sc ale , fou nd at a c omme rcia l
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
& Roof rails (if equipped)
1) Roof rack
Luggage can be carried on the roof after
securing the roof rack to the roof rails.
When installing the roof rack on the roof
rails, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions. The roof rails are designed to carry
loads (luggage and roof rack) of not more
than 150 lbs (68 kg).
CAUTION
. When using the roof rack, make
sure that the total carrying load
of the roof rack and luggage does
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Over-
loading may cause damage to
the vehicle.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rails must be used together
with the roof rack and any appro-
priate carrying attachment that
may be needed. The roof rails
must ne ver be used alone to
carry cargo. Otherwise, damage
to the roof or paint or a danger-
ous road hazard due to loss of
cargo could result.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting driving
characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
Black plate (311,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Roof molding and crossbar
(if equipped)
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof molding must never be used
alone to carry cargo. Otherwise,
damage to the roof or paint or a
dangerous road hazard due to
loss of cargo could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
the vehicle and create a safety
hazard.
Cargo can be carried after securing the
roof crossbar kit to the roof moldings and
installing the appropriate carrying attach-
ment. When installing the roof crossbar
kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the roof crossbar ki t and a carrying
attachment, never exceed the maximum
load limit as explained below. You should
also be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
about loading cargo into or onto your
vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
F8-12. The maximum load limit of the
cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment
must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place
the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest
the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo.
Always properly secure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions and make sure that the attachment is
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
attachments designed specifically for the
crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg).
Before operating the vehicle, make sure
that the cargo is properly secured on the
attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
Driving tips 8-15
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (312,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-16 Driving tips
! Removal and installation of the
crossbars
Each of the two roof moldings has two
mounting points for crossbars. Each
mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use
a flat-head screwdriver to remove the
covers. When installing the crossbars on
the roof molding, follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions.
Trailer hitch (dealer option)
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
tion. For possible recommenda-
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer towing” F8-18.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailer’s max-
imum gross weight. Towing trai-
lers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
could g et loose and create a
traffic safety hazard.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
distributing hitch.
. The standard bumper beam must
be installed after you remove the
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for purchase of a standard
bumper beam if you do not have
the original.
. Safety performance is decreased
and there is increased risk of
injury to passengers in the case
of an accident if the trailer hitch
or a standard bumper beam is
not installed. One of them must
always be installed on the vehi-
cle.
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is
not possible to install the rear
towing hook.
When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer
towing” F8-18.
& Connecting a trailer
1. Remove the receiver cover from the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball
mount into the hitch receiver tube.
Black plate (313,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes
through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin securely into the
hitch pin.
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it
does not come off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains
should cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight turn si tuations into
account; however, be careful not to let
them drag on the ground.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to part
of the vehicle other than the safety
chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, stop, and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
Driving tips 8-17
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (314,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-18 Driving tips
watercraft.
& When you do not tow a trailer
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera-
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the
instructions on correct installation and use
provided by the trailer and other towing
equipment manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, o r from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
& Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused
by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component (en-
gine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum load limits
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are accepta-
Black plate (315,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
ble.
! Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum weight shown in the following
table.
Model Conditions
Maximum
total trailer
weight
MT models
When towing a
trailer without
brakes.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
When towing a
trailer with brakes.
2,400 lbs
(1,087 kg)
AT models
When towing a
trailer without
brakes.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
When towing a
trailer with brakes.
2,400 lbs
(1,087 kg)
When towing a
trailer on a long
uphill grade con-
tinuously for over
5 miles (8 km) with
an outside tem-
perature of 1048F
(408C) or above.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
Driving tips 8-19
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (316,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-20 Driving tips
Certification label
GVWR is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s side door jamb.
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR are also
shown on the certification label.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
! Tongue load
Tongue load
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
and does not exceed the maximum value
of 200 lbs (90 kg).
Black plate (317,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration
above. When weighing the tongue load,
be sure to position the towing coupler at
the height at which it would be during
actual towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front of vehicle
The tongue load can be adjusted by
proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front; approximately
60 percent of the trailer load should be in
the front and approximately 40 percent in
the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
as possible on both the left and right
sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing corne ring, res ulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
& Trailer hitches
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle ex-
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
Driving tips 8-21
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (318,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-22 Driving tips
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer.
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer
hitch is recommended. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-
able, be sure the hitch is suited to your
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-
sional h itch supplier to assist you in
choosing an appropriate hitch for your
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch
manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load.
For all types of hitches, regularly check
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are
tight.
& Connecting a trailer
! Trailer brakes
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped wi th its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes a re
recommended, and must be installed
properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regul ations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
! Trailer safety chains
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing a
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Pass the chains crossing each
other under the trailer tongue to prevent
the trailer from dropping onto the ground
in case the trailer tongue should discon-
nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
slack in the chains taking tight turn
situations into account; however, be care-
ful not to let them drag on the ground.
For more information about the safety
chain connection, refer to the instructions
for your hitch and trailer.
Black plate (319,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
CAUTION
Direct spli cing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehi cle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-
cle’s electrical system requires modifica-
tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the stop lights and turn signal
lights each time you hitch up.
! Tires
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the tem-
porary spare tire is used. The tem-
porary spare tire is not designed to
sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing
can result in failure of the spare tire
and/or less stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “ Tires” F12-
10.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
tire is firmly secured.
& Trailer towing tips
WARNING
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer i n hilly
country on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be dif-
ferent from normal operation. For
safety’s sake, you should employ
extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never
drive at excessive speeds. You
should also keep the following
tips in mind:
! Before starting out on a trip
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
tipped sharply up at the front and down at
Driving tips 8-23
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (320,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
8-24 Driving tips
the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution
are acceptable.
. Check that the tire pressures are
correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that:
– The t railer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– The trailer lights connector is con-
nected properly and trailer’s stop lights
illuminate when the vehicle’s brake
pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s
turn signal lights flash when the
vehicle’s turn signal lever is operated.
– The safety chains are connected
properly.
– All cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
– The side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a sig-
nificant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
erations. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, always start out in first gear
and release the clutch at moderate engine
revolution.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
a tight turn, the tra iler could hit your
vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and slow down
immediately but gradually.
. When passing other vehicles, consid-
erable distance is required because of the
added w eight and len gth ca used by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
1) Left turn
2) Right turn
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
takes practice. When backing up with a
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
for a right turn.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by the nearest SUBARU
dealer.
Black plate (321,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Driving on grades
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent over-
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the following indicators be-
cause the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating.
– Temperature gauge (if equipped)
– Coolant temperature high warning
light (if equipped)
– AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT
models)
. If any of the following conditions occur,
immediately turn off the air conditioner and
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe
location. Refer to “If you park your vehicle
in case of an emergency” F9-2 and
“Engine overheating” F9-13.
– Temperature gauge needle ap-
proaches the OVERHEAT zone (if
equipped). Refer to “ Temperature
gauge (models with type A combina-
tion meter)” F3-11.
– Coolant temperature high warning
light illuminates (if equipped). Refer to
“Coolant temperature low indi cator
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
ing light” F3-16.
– AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-
nates (AT models). Refer to “AT OIL
TEMP warning light (AT models)” F3-
17.
. If your vehicle has an automatic trans-
mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal
to stay stationary on an uphill slope
instead of using the parking brake or foot
brake. That may cause the transmission
fluid to overheat.
. If your vehicle has an automatic trans-
mission, place the select lever as follows.
Uphill slopes: “D” position
Downhill slopes: A low-speed gear posi-
tion to use engine braking
! Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
should take the following steps.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place chocks under
both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release
the brake pedal slowly until the chocks
absorb the load.
4. Press the brake pedal fully and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the brake pedal.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual
transmission models) or the “P” position
(automatic transmission models) and shut
off the engine.
Driving tips 8-25
8
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
If you park your vehicle in case of an
emergency ........................................................ 9-2
Temporary spare tire (if equipped) .................... 9-2
Precautions for AWD models with automatic
transmission ..................................................... 9-3
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-4
Tool bag.............................................................. 9-4
Under the cargo area........................................... 9-5
Flat tires............................................................... 9-6
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 9-9
Jump starting..................................................... 9-10
How to jump start .............................................. 9-11
Engine overheating ........................................... 9-13
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment ................................................... 9-13
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment ................................................... 9-13
Towing ................................................................ 9-14
Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-14
Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-17
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17
Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
opened............................................................. 9-18
In case of emergency
9
Black plate (326,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
9-2 In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in
case of an emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be
used during the daytime and nighttime to
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning flasher by
pushing the hazard warning flasher
switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch
again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Temporary spare tire (if
equipped)
WARNING
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) is unable to monitor all four
road wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for tire
and sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
Black plate (327,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm
2
).
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
& Precautions for AWD models
with automatic transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD
(All-Wheel Drive) system. In addition, if
your vehicle is an AT model, before driving
your vehicle with the temporary spare tire,
deactivate the AWD capability of the
vehicle as follows.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
2. Pull any one spare fuse out of the
spare fuse holder at the back side of the
main fuse box cover in the engine
compartment. You may use any one fuse
in the spare fuse holder.
In case of emergency 9-3
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (328,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
9-4 In case of emergency
1) Spare fuse
2) FWD connector
3. Put a spare fuse inside the FWD
connector located in the cabin and confirm
that the All-Wheel Drive warning light
“
” illuminates. The All-Wheel-Drive
capability of the vehicle has now been
deactivated.
NOTE
After reinstalling the conventional tire,
remove the spare fuse from the FWD
connector in order to reactivate All-
Wheel Drive. Make sure to restore the
removed spare fuse in the spare fuse
holder located on the back side of the
main fuse box cover.
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools:
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt)
. Wheel nut wrench
. Wheel cover remover (only models
with wheel covers)
& Tool bag
1) Screwdriver
2) Wheel nut wrench
3) Tool bag
4) Wheel cover remover (only models with
wheel covers)
The screwdriver and wheel nut wrench are
stored in the tool bag.
Black plate (329,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Under the cargo area
1) Under-floor storage compartment (if
equipped) (Refer to “Under-floor storage
compartment” F6-16)
2) Jack handle
3) Tool bucket
4) Spare tire
1) Wheel nut wrench
2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
4) Towing hook (eye bolt)
The jack handle is stored under the cargo
floor. The jack and towing hook are stored
in the tool bucket that is located in the
recess of the spare tire wheel.
Also, the tools in the tool bag can be
stored in the tool bucket as illustrated.
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”
F9-6.
In case of emergency 9-5
9
Black plate (330,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
9-6 In case of emergency
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire
WARNING
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
severe accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack.
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out
of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a severe
accident.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
or the select lever in the “P” (Park) position
(AT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put chocks at the front and rear of the
tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the cargo area. Refer to
“Maintenance tools” F9-4.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
Models with standard spare tire
Black plate (331,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Models with temporary spare tire
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F 9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
1) Notch
2) Valve hole
7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
a wheel cover remover into the notch on
the opposite side of the valve hole and pry
the wheel cover to remove it.
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
9. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
In case of emergency 9-7
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (332,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
9-8 In case of emergency
10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to “Tires” F12-10. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
Black plate (333,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
compartment. Put in the spacer and tight-
en the attaching bolt firmly.
Also store the jack, jack handle and wheel
nut wrench in their storage locations.
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
Type A
Type B
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused running over
a sharp object).
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving
straight ahead while gradually redu-
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to l ose air
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
In case of emergency 9-9
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (334,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
9-10 In case of emergency
it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one min-
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
Jump starting
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly fl ush the exposed
area with water immediately. Get
medical help if the fluid has
entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
eye protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are avail-
able.
. A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
Black plate (335,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
In case of emergency 9-11
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (336,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
9-12 In case of emergency
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of th e other
jumper cable to the negative (− )
terminal of the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, car efully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
Black plate (337,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has fully cooled down.
When the engine is hot, the coolant
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot
could release a spray of boiling hot
coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the
road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If no steam is coming from
the engine compartment
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-14.
1. Keep the en gine r unni ng at id ling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment. Refer to “Engine hood”
F11-5.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your SUBARU
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If any of the following conditions occur,
turn off the engine.
. The temperature gauge stays in the
overheated zone (if equipped). Refer
to “Temperature gauge (models with
type A combination meter)” F3-11.
. The coolant temperature high warn-
ing light remains illuminated (if
equipped). Refer to “Coolant tempera-
ture low indicator light/Coolant tem-
perature high warning light” F3-16.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reservoir.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reservoir,
add coolant to the reservoir. Then remove
the radiator cap (non-turbo models) or the
coolant filler tank cap (turbo models) and
fill the radiator with coolant.
If you have to remove a hot radiator cap/
coolant filler tank cap, first wrap a thick
cloth around the cap, then turn the cap
counterclockwise slowly without pressing
down until it stops. Release the pressure
from the cooling system. After the pres-
sure has been fully released, remove the
cap by pressing it down and turning
counterclockwise.
In case of emergency 9-13
9
Black plate (338,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
9-14 In case of emergency
Towing
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety.
WARNING
Never tow AWD models (both AT and
MT) with either front or rear wheels
off the ground. This will cause the
vehicle to spin away due to the
operation or deterioration of the
center differential.
& Towing and tie-down hooks
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
WARNING
. D o not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. In particular,
leaving the front towing hook
mounted on the vehicle could
interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system in a
frontal collision.
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hook. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
front bumper and the towing
hook, do not apply excessive
lateral load to the towing hook.
Front towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bag. Take the wheel nut wrench out of
the cargo area.
2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper
using a flat-head screwdriver, and you will
find a threaded hole for attaching the
towing hook.
Black plate (339,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook se curely
using a wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Rear towing hook:
CAUTION
If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not
possible to install the rear towing
hook.
To install the rear towing hook, the
standard bumper beam must be
installed on the vehicle at a
SUBARU dealer. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for details.
Use a hitch ball and follow the
instructions below when towing.
. The weight of the object being
towed must be less than the
weight of the vehicle.
. Drive the vehicle 20 mph (32
km/h) or less speed.
. Do not drive more than 31 miles
(50 km).
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bag. Take the wheel nut wrench out of
the cargo area.
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a flat-head screwdriver, and you will
find a threaded hole for attaching the
towing hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
In case of emergency 9-15
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (340,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
9-16 In case of emergency
4. Tighten the towing hook se curely
using a wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Front tie-down hooks:
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Rear tie-down hooks:
The rear tie-down hooks are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down hooks only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip off
the hooks, possibly causing a dan-
gerous situation.
Black plate (341,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position for automatic transmission mod-
els or “1st ” for manual transmission
models.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
spoiler and rear underspoil er (if
equipped), be careful not to scrape
them when placing the vehicle on
the carrier and when removing the
vehicle from the carrier.
& Towing with all wheels on the
ground
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle is being towed because
the steering wheel and the direc-
tion of the wheels will be locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take gr eater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Trans-
mission damage could result if
the vehicle is towed with the
engine running.
. For models with automatic trans-
mission, the traveling speed
must be limited to less than 20
mph (30 km/h) and the traveling
distance to less than 31 miles (50
km). For greater speeds and
In case of emergency 9-17
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (342,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
9-18 In case of emergency
distances, transport your vehicle
on a flat-bed truck.
Rear gate – if the rear gate
cannot be opened
In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by operating the rear gate opener
button, you can open it from inside the
cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind
the rear gate trim panel.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate open
lever with fingers because doing so
may cause an injury. Always use a
flat-head screwdriver or a similar
tool.
3. Slide the lever to the right position
using a flat-head screwdriver to open the
rear gate.
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2
Washing............................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing......................................... 10-3
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4
Cleaning the interi or.......................................... 10-5
Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5
Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, and switches .................. 10-5
Monitor (if equipped).......................................... 10-6
Cargo tray (if equipped) ..................................... 10-6
Appearance care
10
Black plate (346,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
10-2 Appearance care
Exterior care
& Washing
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and area adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air in-
take, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid res ervoir, it will
cause engine trouble or a mal-
function of power steering.
. Do not use organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. If a deter-
gent with o rganic s olvents is
mistakenly used to wash the
surface, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the surface may be damaged.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with a rear wiper, automatic car-
wash b rushes could bec ome
tangled around it, damaging the
wiper arm and other compo-
nents. Ask the automatic car-
wash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car was h is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth.
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
pension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
water at frequent intervals to reduce the
harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-
sion and axle parts, as they are particu-
larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do
not use a sharp-edged tool to remove
caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor ha rnesses, and
other parts when washing sus-
Black plate (347,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
pension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
! Using a warm water washer
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are
of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as moldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a mo nth, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A
No. 2000 grain compound is recom-
mended. Never use a coarse-grained
compound. Coa rse-grained compounds
with a smaller grain-size number could
damage the paint. After polishing with a
compound, coat with wax to restore the
original luster. Frequent polishing with a
compound or an incorrect polishing tech-
nique will result in removing the paint layer
and exp osing the undercoat. When in
doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
list.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. If a polish or wax
with organic solvents is mistakenly
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning aluminum wheels
. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
num whe els) with water as soon as
possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
agents.
Appearance care 10-3
10
Black plate (348,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
10-4 Appearance care
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of
corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retain-
ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust
control chemicals, or used in coastal
areas where there is more salt in the air,
or in areas where there is considerable
industrial pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corro-
sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila-
tion.
& To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regu larly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of t he
following surfaces.
. Roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. Mud, sand, or gravel
. Coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventil ated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, and hood latch should
be inspected and lubricated periodically.
Black plate (349,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Cleaning the interior
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabri c surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and luke-
warm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instruc-
tions.
NOTE
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials.
& Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrin kles, which is characteristi c of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
or gasoline must never be used on
leather or synthetic interior materials.
& Climate control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel,
console panel, and switches
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or fuel, or
strong cleaning agents that con-
tain those solvents.
Appearance care 10-5
– CONTINUED –
10
Black plate (350,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
10-6 Appearance care
. Do not use c hemical solvents
that contain silicone on the vehi-
cle audio system, electrical com-
ponents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
to these p arts, it may cause
damage to electrical compo-
nents.
& Monitor (if equipped)
To clean the audio/navigation mo nitor,
wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty,
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
any remaining detergent.
NOTE
. Do not spray neutral detergent di-
rectly onto the monitor. Doing so could
damage the monitor’s components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a hard
cloth. Doing so could scratch the
monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that con-
tains thinner, gasoline, or any other
volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid
could erase the lettering on the
switches at the bottom of the monitor.
& Cargo tray (if equipped)
The cargo tray is provided to protect the
cargo area carpet. This cargo tray is
removable to facilitate easy clean up.
Clean with a cloth when necessary using
mild soap and water. It is important that
the bottom of the liner is dry before placing
it back in the cargo area, as mildew may
result.
Do not install the cargo tray if the cargo
area carpet is damp or wet, as mildew
may result. Dry the carpet completely
before the cargo tray is installed.
Upon installation after prolonged storage,
you may notice that the tray does not
completely lay flat. This is only temporary.
To help return the tray to its original shape,
place the tray on the floor of the vehicle
with a weight on each corner.
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment.................................................... 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment (non-turbo models)...................... 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-5
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-7
Non-turbo models .............................................. 11-7
Turbo models ..................................................... 11-8
Engine oil............................................................ 11-9
Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-9
Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-11
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-13
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-13
Cooling system ................................................ 11-13
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-14
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-14
Air cleaner elemen t .......................................... 11-15
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-15
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-17
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-18
Turbo models ................................................... 11-18
Non-turbo models ............................................ 11-18
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-19
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-19
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-19
Automatic transmission fluid.......................... 11-20
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-20
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-21
Front differential gear oil (AT models) ........... 11-21
Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-21
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22
Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-22
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22
Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-22
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-22
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-23
Brake fluid........................................................ 11-23
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-23
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-24
Clutch fluid (MT models)................................. 11-24
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24
Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-25
Brake booster .................................................. 11-25
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-26
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-26
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-26
Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-27
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-27
Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-27
Hill start assist system (MT models).............. 11-27
Replacement of bra ke pad and lining ............ 11-28
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-28
Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-29
Maintenance and service
11
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Maintenance and service
Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-29
Types of tires ................................................... 11-29
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................ 11-29
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-31
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-31
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-33
Wear indicators................................................ 11-34
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-34
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-35
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-35
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-36
Wheel covers (if equipped) ............................... 11-36
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-37
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-37
Replacement of wiper blades ......................... 11-39
Windshield wiper blade assembly..................... 11-39
Windshield wiper blade rubber......................... 11-40
Rear window wiper blade assembly.................. 11-41
Rear window wiper blade rubber ...................... 11-41
Battery .............................................................. 11-43
Fuses ................................................................ 11-44
Installation of accessories .............................. 11-45
Replacing bulbs............................................... 11-45
Headlights (models with HID headlights)........... 11-45
Headlights (models without HID headlights)...... 11-46
Parking light .................................................... 11-48
Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-48
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-48
License plate light ........................................... 11-49
Dome light, map light, cargo area light and
door step light ............................................... 11-50
Other lights on the vehicle ............................... 11-51
Black plate (355,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are re-
quired, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service
by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-W heel Drive
vehicle must NEVER be per-
formed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar appara-
tus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehi-
cle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
viced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or all ow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
Maintenance and service 11-3
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (356,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat-
belt pretensioner system, or at-
tempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inop-
erative. NEVER use a circuit
tester for this wiring. If your
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten-
sioner needs service, consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Before checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. Always remove the key from the
ignition switch. When the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position,
thecoolingfanmayoperate
suddenly even when the engine
is stopped.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system (a
dealer option) temporarily place
that system in the service mode
to prevent it from unexpectedly
starting the engine.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
(non-turbo models)
CAUTION
. Do not contact the belt cover
while checking the components
in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause your hand
to slip off the belt cover and
result in an unexpected injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down comple-
tely. Doing so may result in a
burn or other injury. Note that the
oil filter becomes very hot when
the engine is running and re-
mains hot for some time after
Black plate (357,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
the engine has stopped.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
while the engine is running
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, belts and an y other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
Engine hood
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
position.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
3. Release the secondary hood latch by
moving the lever between the front grille
and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
thehoodforciblytocloseit.Itcould
deform the metal.
Maintenance and service 11-5
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (358,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-6 Maintenance and service
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
Black plate (359,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Engine compartment overview
& Non-turbo models
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-22)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-19) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-21)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-24)
4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-20)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-23)
6) Fuse box (page 11-44)
7) Battery (page 11-43)
8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-37)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)
11) Radiator cap (page 11-14)
12) Engine oil filter (page 11-11)
13) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9)
14) Air cleaner case (page 11-15)
Maintenance and service
11-7
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (360,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-8 Maintenance and service
& Turbo models
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-22)
2) Differential g ear oil level gauge (AT)
(page 11-21)
3) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-20)
4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-23)
5) Fuse box (page 11-44)
6) Battery (page 11-43)
7) Windshield washer tank (page 11-37)
8) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)
10) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9)
11) Radiator cap (page 11-14)
12) Air cleaner case (page 11-15)
Black plate (361,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Engine oil
NOTE
. The engine oil consumption rate is
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be
determined until the vehicle has tra-
veled at least several thousand miles
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
ing conditions such as those men-
tionedintheWarrantyandMainte-
nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than un-
der normal driving conditions. If you
drive your vehicle under these severe
conditions, you should check the oil
level at least at every second fuel fill-up
time, and change the oil more fre-
quently. Please refer to the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet for more de-
tails.
. If the oil consumption rate seems
abnormally high after t he break-in
period, for example more than 1 quart
per 1,200 miles (1 liter per 2,000 kilo-
meters), contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine. Wait a few minutes for the
oil to drain back into the oil pan.
Turbo models
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
Non-turbo models
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
Maintenance and service 11-9
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (362,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-10 Maintenance and service
Turbo models
1) Notch
2) Full level
3) Low level
4) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
Non-turbo models
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops. For turbo models,
the graphic symbol “
” on the top of the
gauge should be positioned as shown in
the illustration.
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. Non-turbo models:
Check the oil levels on both sides of the
level gauge. The engine oil level must be
judged by the lowest of the two levels. If
the oil level is below the low level mark,
add oil so that the full level is reached.
Turbo models:
Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil
level is below the low level mark, add oil
so that the full level is reached.
CAUTION
. For non-turbo models, be careful
not to touch the engine oil filter
when removing the oil filler cap.
Doing so may result in a burn, a
pinched finger, or may cause
some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
Black plate (363,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
NOTE
. Just after driving or while the engine
is warm, the engine oil level reading
may be in a range between the full level
and the notch mark (turbo models).
This is caused by thermal expansion of
the engine oil.
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
do not add any additional oil above the
full level when the engine is cold.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
CAUTION
. If you change your own oil, be
sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal.
. Do not dispose of used engine oil
by placing it in the trash, or by
pouring it onto the ground, into
sewers, or into any body of water.
Check with your local govern-
ment office for the proper dis-
posal options available to you.
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter m ust be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently ma de, or when driv ing in
extremely cold weather.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
Turbo models
Non-turbo models
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the drain plug while the engine is still
warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with
hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain
plug with a clean cloth and tighten it
securely with a new sealing washer after
the oil has completely drained out.
6. Remove the under cover (turbo mod-
els).
Maintenance and service 11-11
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (364,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-12 Maintenance and service
Non-turbo models
Turbo models
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench.
8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a
thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
9. Clean the seal seating area. Screw on
the oil filter by hand until its seal contacts
the seating surface. Be careful not to twist
or damage the seal.
10. Tighten the oil filter further by the
amount indicated in the following table.
Turbo models
Oil filter color Part number
Amount of
rotation
Black
15208AA100 1 rotation
Blue 15208AA12A
7/8
rotation
Non-turbo models
Oil filter color Part number
Amount of
rotation
Black 15208AA160
1 rotation
CAUTION
. Never over tighten the oil filter
because that can result in an oil
leak.
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.
If spilled oil is not promptly
wiped up, the oil could cause a
fire.
11. Reinstall under cover (turbo models).
12. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
For the oil capacity guideline, refer to
“Engine oil” F12-5.
The oil quantity indicated above is only
guideline.
The necessary quantity of oil depends on
the quantity of oil that has been drained.
The quantity of drained oil differs slightly
depending on the temperature of the oil
and the time the oil is left flowing out. After
refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you
must use the level gauge to confirm that
the level is correct.
13. Start the engine and make sure that no
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber
seal and drain plug.
14. Run the engine until it reaches the
normal operating temperature. Then stop
the engine and wait a few minutes to allow
the oil drain back. Check the oil level
again and if necessary, add more engine
oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
Black plate (365,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-5.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en-
gine.
& Synthetic oil
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
oil” F12-5. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Cooling system
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
does not require the first change
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
should not be mixed with any
other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top up the coolant
for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted w ith another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
Maintenance and service 11-13
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (366,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-14 Maintenance and service
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
nections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the following conditions occur,
the cooling fan circuit may be defective.
. The engine coolant temperature gauge
exceeds the normal operating range (if
equipped). Refer to “Temperature gauge
(models with type A combination meter)”
F3-11.
. The coolant temperature high warning
light blinks or illuminates in RED (i f
equipped). Refer to “Coolant temperature
low indicator light/Coolant temperature
high warning light” F3-16.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-44 and “Fuse panel
located in the engine compartment” F12-
13.
If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
sary, there may be a leak in the engine
cooling system. It is recommended that
the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
& Engine coolant
! Checking the coolant level
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reservoir is
empty, remove the radiator cap (non-turbo
models) or the coolant filler tank cap
(turbo models) and refill as required.
NOTE (turbo models only)
The cap (without tabs) on top of the
radiator does not need to be removed.
Remove the cap (with tabs) on the
coolant filler tank on top of the engine.
3. After refilling the reservoir and the
radiator, reinstall the caps after checking
that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator
cap/coolant filler tank cap are in the proper
position.
Black plate (367,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap/coolant filler tank cap until
the engine has been shut off and
has cooled down completely. Since
the coolant is under pressure, you
may suffer serious burns from a
spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
Air cleaner element
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perfo-
rated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
It is not necessary to clean or wash the
element.
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner el ement not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
& Replacing the air cleaner
element
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
! Non-turbo models
1) Connector
2) Clip
3) Clamp
4) Air intake boot
5) Clip
1. Unplug the connector that is attached
to the top of the air cleaner case.
2. Detach the clip on the connector cable
from the right side of the air cleaner case.
Maintenance and service 11-15
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (368,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-16 Maintenance and service
3. Loosen the screw of the clamp and
pull the air intake boot out of the air
cleaner case.
4. Unsnap the two clips and open the air
cleaner case.
5. Remove the air cleaner element.
6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
with a damp cloth and install a new air
cleaner element.
7. If the rear air cleaner case has been
removed, insert the three projections on
the rear air cleaner case into the slits on
the front air cleaner case.
8. Install the removed parts in the reverse
order of removal.
! Turbo models
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct.
1) Connector
2) Clip
Black plate (369,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2. Unplug the connector that is attached
to the top of the air cleaner case.
3. Unsnap the two clips and open the air
cleaner case.
4. Remove the air cleaner element.
5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
with a damp cloth and install a new air
cleaner element.
6. If the rear air cleaner case has been
removed, insert the three projections on
the rear air cleaner case into the slits on
the front air cleaner case.
7. Install the removed parts in the reverse
order of removal.
Spark plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
NOTE
For the recommended spark plugs,
refer to “Electrical system” F12-3.
Maintenance and service 11-17
11
Black plate (370,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-18 Maintenance and service
Drive belts
& Turbo models
1) Power steering oil pump pulley
2) Front side belt
3) Alternator pulley
4) Air conditioner compressor pulley
5) Rear side belt
6) Crank pulley
A) 22 lbf (98 N, 10 kgf)
CAUTION
The front side belt, which runs in
conjunction with the following com-
ponents, must be used within the
specified deflection.
. Power steering oil pump pulley
. Alternator pulley
. Crank pulley
Check the deflection of the front
side belt and if there is any loosen-
ess, cracks, wear or unusual noise
on the front side belt, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Continuing to use the vehicle with
the belt outside of the specification
may cause the engine to malfunc-
tion and the above components to
malfunction.
To check the deflection of the front side
belt, place a straightedge (ruler) across
two adjacent pulleys (alternator pulley and
crank pulley) and apply a force of 22 lbf
(98 N, 10 kgf) midway between the pulleys
by using a spring scale. The belt deflec-
tion should be the amount specified. If the
front side belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
in (mm)
Deflection
New belt
Used belt
A
0.28 – 0.35
(7.0 – 9.0)
0.35 – 0.43
(9.0 – 11.0)
The rear side belt is a stretch-type belt,
therefore the deflection does not need to
be checked. If there are cracks or wear
confirmed on the belts and a squeaking
sound is heard from them, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
& Non-turbo models
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of
the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of
the belt should be done according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (371,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Manual transmission oil
& Checking the oil level
1) Yellow handle
Check the oil level monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
1) Full level
2) Low level
3. Pull out the level gauge again and
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
low level, add oil through the level gauge
hole to bring the level up to the full level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill manual trans-
mission oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands t ogether. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-8.
Maintenance and service 11-19
11
Black plate (372,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-20 Maintenance and service
Automatic transmission fluid
& Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands
largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
level differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, there are two different scales
for checking the level of hot fluid and cold
fluid on the level gauge.
Though the fluid level can be checked
without warming up the fluid on the
“COLD” range, it is recommended to
check the fluid level when the fluid is at
operating temperature.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is hot
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise
the temperature of the transmission fluid
up to normal operating temperature; 158
to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
set the parking brake.
3. First shift the select lever in each
position. Then shift it in the “P” position,
and run the engine at idling speed.
1) Yellow handle
1) HOT range
2) COLD range
3) Full level
4) Low level
4. Pull out the level gauge and check the
fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the
low level on the “HOT” range, add the
recommended automatic transmission
fluid up to the full level.
NOTE
Do not fill the automatic transmission
fluid over the full level.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked
without time to warm up the automatic
transmission, check that the fluid level is
between the low level and full level on the
“COLD” range. If it is below that range,
add fluid up to the full level. Be careful not
to overfill.
CAUTION
Be careful not to sp ill automatic
transmission fluid when adding it.
If automatic transmission fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If automatic transmission fluid
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
wipe it off.
Black plate (373,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Recommended fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-9.
NOTE
Using any non-specified type of auto-
matic transmission fluid could result in
damage inside the transmission. When
replacing the automatic transmission
fluid, be sure to use the specified type.
Front differential gear oil (AT
models)
& Checking the oil level
1) Yellow handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
1) Full level
2) Low level
3. Pull out the level gauge again and
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
low level, add oil to bring the level up to
the full level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill front differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
Maintenance and service 11-21
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (374,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-22 Maintenance and service
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-8.
Rear differential gear oil
There is no rear differential gear oil level
gauge. To check the rear differential gear
oil level, consult your SUBARU dealer for
inspection.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual tra nsmis sion, fro nt differen tial
and rear differential gear oil” F12-8.
Power steering fluid
& Checking the fluid level
The power steering fluid expands greatly
as its temperature rises; the fluid level
differs acc ordi ng t o flui d t empera ture .
Therefore, the reservoir has two different
checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level
monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
and stop the engine.
Black plate (375,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has
been run: Check that the oil level is
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on
the surface of the reservoir.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
run: Check that the oil level is between
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
surface of the reservoir.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the
applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
mended fluid as necessary to bring the
level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extremely low, it may
indicate possible leakage. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself
because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. Never use
different brands of fluids to-
gether.
. Be careful not to spill power
steering fluid when adding it. If
power steering fluid touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
& Recommended fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-9.
Brake fluid
& Checking the fluid level
1) “MAX” level mark
2) “MIN” level mark
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add
the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use o nly bra ke fluid from a sealed
container.
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
Maintenance and service 11-23
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (376,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-24 Maintenance and service
clean water. For safety, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moi sture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
& Recommended brake fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-9.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Clutch fluid (MT models)
& Checking the fluid level
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
to “MAX” level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
Black plate (377,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your
eyes because clutch fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. When clutch fluid is added, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
. Never splash the clutch fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
& Recommended clutch fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-9.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of clutch
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following, have it checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine . The pedal shoul d move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
NOTE
For models equipped with the brake
assist system, when you depress the
brake pedal strongly or suddenly while
the engine is running, the following
phenomena occur. They do not indicate
any malfunctions, and the brake assist
system is operating properly.
Maintenance and service 11-25
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (378,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-26 Maintenance and service
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener-
ates a greater braking force.
. You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compart-
ment.
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free pl ay and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal
free play
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the
brake pedal several times. Then, check
the free play by pulling up the brake pedal
with a force of less than 2 lbf (10 N, 1 kgf).
If the fre e play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
& Checking the brake pedal
reserve distance
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (379,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Clutch pedal (MT models)
Check the clutch pedal free play according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet ” .
& Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
transmission smoothly couple without
any sign of slippage.
& Checking the clutch pedal
free play
1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with
your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play.
If the fre e play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
Hill start assist system (MT
models)
Ensure that the Hill start assist system
operates properly under the following
circumstances:
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal and clutch
pedal, with the engine running.
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
move backward even afte r the b rake
pedal is released.
3. Then make sure the vehicle can start
climbing the grade by following the normal
starting procedures.
If the Hill start assist system does not
operate as described above, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Maintenance and service 11-27
11
Black plate (380,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-28 Maintenance and service
Replacement of brake pad
and lining
Each disc brake has audible wear indica-
tors on the brake pads. If the brake pads
wear close to their service limit, the wear
indicator makes a very audible scraping
noise when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
wear indicator, it will result in the
need for costly brake rotor repair or
replacement.
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be
broken in as follows.
WARNING
A safe location and situation should
be selected for break-in driving.
! Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times.
! Parking brake lining
CAUTION
Pulling the parking brake lever too
forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
certain to pull the lever up slowly
and gently.
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
force of approximately 34 lb f [150 N,
15.3 kgf]).
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
dure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
parking brake stroke is out of the specified
range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke:
7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
Black plate (381,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenan ce Bookl et”.
When the parking brake is properly
adjusted, braking power is fully applied
by pulling the lever up 7 to 8 notches
gently but firmly (approximately 45 lbf [200
N, 20.4 kgf]). If the parking brake lever
stroke is not within the specified range,
have the brake system checked and
adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
Tires and wheels
& Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
The factory-fitted tires are all-season tires.
! All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy r oad
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snow-
covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
not react immediately to a sudden drop in
tire pressure (f or example, a blow-out
caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on the
tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
Maintenance and service 11-29
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (382,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-30 Maintenance and service
the temperature in the garage and the
temperature outside. By way of example,
the following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various out-
side temperatures when the temperature
in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: P215/65R16 96H
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front Rear
308F(−18C)
33
(230, 2.3)
32
(220, 2.2)
108F(−128C)
35
(240, 2.4)
34
(235, 2.35)
−108F(−238C)
37
(255, 2.55)
36
(250, 2.5)
Example:
Tire size: P225/55R17 95H
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front
Rear
308F(−18C)
35
(240, 2.4)
33
(230, 2.3)
108F(−128C)
37
(255, 2.55)
35
(240, 2.4)
−108F(−238C)
39
(270, 2.7)
37
(255, 2.55)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not turn off,
the tire pressure monitoring system may
not be functioning normally. In this event,
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the
system inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by
an increase in the outside air temperature
or by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to turn off.
System resetting is necessary when the
wheels are changed (for example, a
switch to snow tir es) and new TPMS
valves are installed on the newly fitted
wheels. Have this work performed by a
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-
ment.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement, there-
fore, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (383,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have signif icant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
& Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are
free from serious damage, nails, and
stones. At the same time, check the tires
for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
rough surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach the curbs as squarely as
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you
park the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration while
driving or find it difficult to steer the
vehicle in a straight line, one of the
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
& Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives
and is essential for good running perfor-
mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long
journey.
Maintenance and service 11-31
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (384,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-32 Maintenance and service
Check the tire pressures when the tires
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm
2
) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they
cause the tires to wear abnormally.
. Correct tire pressure (tread wor n
evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steerin g is
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
fuel consumption is also lower.
Black plate (385,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
worn at shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
sumption is also higher.
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
worn in center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road surface
bumps and dips, possibly re sulting in
vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for
the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the
tire pressures to the values that match
current loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
& Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel alignment
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicle’s running
stability. Contact your SUBARU
dealer if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
Maintenance and service 11-33
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (386,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-34 Maintenance and service
NOTE
The suspension system is designed to
hold each wheel at a certain alignment
(relative to the other wheels and to the
road) for optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes vis ible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
beyond the acceptable limit and
must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible.
& Tire rotation direction mark
Example of tire rotation direction mark
1) Front
If the tire has the rotation di rection
specification, the tire rotation direction
mark is placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
the direction mark facing forward.
Black plate (387,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Tire rotation
Models equipped with 4 non-unidirectional
tires
1) Front
Models equipped with unidirectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To
maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to
rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
km). Move the tires to the positions shown
in the illustration each time they are
rotated.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tires at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tire pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximatel y 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
and retighten any nut that has become
loose.
& Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standa rd equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
size, circumference, construction, manu-
facturer, brand (tread pattern), degree of
wear, speed symbol and load index. You
are advised to replace the tires with new
ones that are identical to those fitted as
standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at
the same time.
WARNING
. When replacing a tire, you must
use a tire that is of the same size,
circumference, construction,
brand (tread pattern), speed sym-
bol and load index as the original
tires listed on the tire placard.
Using tires of other sizes, cir-
cumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride,
handling, braking, speedometer/
Maintenance and service 11-35
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (388,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-36 Maintenance and service
odometer calibration, and clear-
ance between the body and tires.
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control.
. You must install four tires that are
of the same size, circumference,
construction, manufacturer,
brand (tread pattern), degree of
wear, speed symbol and load
index. Mixing tires of different
types, sizes or degrees of wear
can result in damage to the
vehicle’s power train. Use of
different types or sizes of tires
can also dangerously reduce
controllability and braking per-
formance and can lea d to an
accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously re-
duce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due to damage,
for example, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing dur-
ing turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
NOTE
When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced fo r tire ro tation or to
change a flat tire, always check the
tightness of the wheel nuts after driv-
ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km).
If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
& Wheel covers (if equipped)
! Removing the wheel cover
1) Notch
2) Valve hole
Insert a wheel cover remover into the
notch part on the opposite side of the
valve hole and pry the wheel cover to
remove it.
Black plate (389,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Installing the wheel cover
Align the valve with the valve hole in the
cover, then fit the cover on the wheel by
tapping your hand evenly around the
circumference of the cover.
Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat tire, always check the tightness of
the wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield
but the supply of washer fluid appears to
diminish, check the level of washer fluid in
the tank.
Maintenance and service 11-37
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (390,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-38 Maintenance and service
Washer fluid level gauge
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
check the fluid level indicated by the level
gauge (attached to the inside of the cap).
If the level is near the “Low” mark, add
fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the
level gauge or the “FULL ” mark on the
tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable, use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30%
10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100% −498F(−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the washer tank with a fluid with a
different concentration from the one used
previously, purge the old fluid from the
piping between the washe r tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outsid e
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the washer tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive . Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
. Never use engine coolant as
washer fluid because it could
cause paint damage.
Black plate (391,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Replacement of wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a
sponge or soft cloth wi th a neutral
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause d eterioration of th e
wiper blades.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original posi tions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,
carefully return the wiper arms
on the windshield while support-
ing them with your hands. You
should not return the wiper arms
to the windshield only by the
return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
per arms may be deformed and/
or the windshield surface may be
scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
& Windshield wiper blade as-
sembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Open the cover
2) Pull down the wiper blade
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
opening the cover and pulling it down in
the direction shown in the illustration.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Maintenance and service 11-39
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (392,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-40 Maintenance and service
& Windshield wiper blade rub-
ber
1) Support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly to
release the claws of the support from the
stoppers on the rubber. Pull and remove
the blade rubber completely.
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the support with the
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade
rubber assembly into the support until it is
locked.
1) Claw
2) Stopper
4. Make sure the stoppers on the blade
rubber are engaged and locked into the
claws. If the r ubber is not retained
properly, the wiper blade may scratch the
windshield.
Black plate (393,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Rear window wiper blade
assembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
terclockwise.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
& Rear window wiper blade
rubber
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
Maintenance and service 11-41
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (394,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-42 Maintenance and service
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
5. Securely retain both ends of the
rubber with the stoppers on the plastic
support ends. If the rubber is not retained
properly, the wiper may scratch the rear
window glass.
Black plate (395,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Battery
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and light-
ers. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, wear eye protection
when working near any battery in
case an explosion does occur.
Never lean over a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of spark s,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short cir-
cuit will result.
. Keep everyone particularly chil-
dren away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a well-
ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer.
Wash hands after handling
.
1) Cap
2) Upper level
3) Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the caps and fill to
the upper level with distilled water.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
Maintenance and service 11-43
11
Black plate (396,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-44 Maintenance and service
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt if an
overload occurs to prevent damage to the
wiring harness and electrical equipment.
The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver ’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
The other one (main fuse box) is in the
engine compartment.
The spare fuses are stored in the main
fuse box cover in the engine compart-
ment.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect t he
Black plate (397,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and turn off all electrical acces-
sories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-11.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dea ler
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle.
Replacing bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
chart” F12-15.
& Headlights (models with HID
headlights)
WARNING
High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs
are used for the low beams of the
headlights. These HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage. To avoid the
risk of an electric shock that could
result in serious injury, observe the
Maintenance and service 11-45
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (398,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-46 Maintenance and service
following precautions.
. Do not replace any headl ight
bulbs (both low beam and high
beam) by yourself.
. Do not remove/restore the head-
light assemblies by yourself.
. Do not remove any headlight-
assembly components by your-
self.
For replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
& Headlights (models without
HID headlights)
CAUTION
Halogen hea dlig ht bu lb s bec ome
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
! Low beam light bulbs
Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct (right-hand side).
Left-hand side
Black plate (399,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove
the secured clip of the washer tank. To
make it easy to access the bulb, move the
washer tank to the horizontal direction
(left-hand side).
3. Remove the bulb cover by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Replace the bulb with a new one. At
this time, do not touch the bulb surface.
7. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Install the bulb cover.
10. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
11. Set the washer tank to the original
place and secure it by clip (left-hand side).
! High beam light bulbs
Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct (right-hand side).
Maintenance and service 11-47
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (400,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-48 Maintenance and service
2. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, be careful not to touch the bulb
surface. Turn the bulb clockwise until it
clicks.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
& Parking light
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out the socket.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
& Front turn signal light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Rear combination lights
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove
the upper and lower screws that secure
the rear combination light assembly.
Black plate (401,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
2. Slide the rear combination light as-
sembly rearward and remove it from the
vehicle.
1) Stop light/Tail light
2) Rear turn signal light
3) Backup light
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
6. Put the rear combination light assem-
bly into place while aligning the clip with
the guide on the vehicle.
7. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
& License plate light
1. Remove the mounting screws using a
Phillips screwdriver.
Maintenance and service 11-49
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (402,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
11-50 Maintenance and service
2. Remove the cover and lens.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens and cover.
6. Tighten the mounting screws.
& Dome light, map light, cargo
area light and door step light
CAUTION
When the door or the rear gate is
opened, the lights may illuminate
and the bulbs may become very hot.
Observe the following precautions
in order to avoid burning yourself.
. When replacing the bulb of the
door step light, a lways wear
gloves.
. When replacing the other bulb,
close the door and the rear gate,
and wait until the bulb becomes
cool enough.
Dome light (type A)
Dome light (type B)
Map light
Cargo area light
Black plate (403,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Door step light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Other lights on the vehicle
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs
of other vehicle lights. Have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
Maintenance and service 11-51
11
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2
Dimensions........................................................ 12-2
Engine ............................................................... 12-3
Electrical system................................................ 12-3
Fuel ................................................................... 12-4
Engine oil .......................................................... 12-5
Manual transmission, front differential and rear
differential gear oil ........................................... 12-8
Fluids ................................................................ 12-9
Engine coolant ................................................... 12-9
Tires................................................................ 12-10
Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-11
Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment ................................................. 12-11
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment ................................................. 12-13
Bulb chart......................................................... 12-15
Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-18
Specifications
12
Black plate (406,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item
Non-turbo models Turbo models
Overall length 179.5 (4,560)
Overall width
70.1 (1,780)
Overall height
without roof rail 65.9 (1,675)
with roof rail 66.9 (1,700)
Wheel base 103.0 (2,615)
Tread
Front 60.2 (1,530)
Rear 60.2 (1,530)
Ground clearance*
1
8.7 (220)
8.9 (225)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty
Black plate (407,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Engine
Engine model
FB25
(2.5-liter, DOHC, non-turbo)
EJ255
(2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,498 (152) 2,457 (150)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.7 6 3.5 (94.0 6 90.0) 3.9 6 3.1 (99.5 6 79.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1
Firing order
1 – 3 – 2 – 4
& Electrical system
Battery type and capacity (5HR)
MT 12V-48AH (55D23L)
AT 12V-52AH (65D23L)
Alternator 12V-110A
Spark plugs
Non-turbo engine SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)
Turbo engine
SILFR6A (NGK)
AT: Automatic transmission
MT: Manual transmission
Specifications
12-3
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (408,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12-4 Specifications
& Fuel
NOTE
The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline.
Model Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Non-turbo 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Turbo
91 AKI (95 RON) or higher*
1
*1: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
may be temporarily used. For details, refer to “Fuel” F7-2.
Black plate (409,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Engine oil
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-9.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
Specifications 12-5
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (410,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12-6 Specifications
! Alternative engine oil
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
! Non-turbo models
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Oil capacity
API classification SM or SN with
the words
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or
“RESOURCE CONSERVING”
or
ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can
be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst
mark)
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil
for optimum engine performance and
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if replenishment is needed but
should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic
oil at the next oil change.
– Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.5 US qt (5.2 liters, 4.6 Imp qt)
Black plate (411,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
! Turbo models
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Oil capacity
API classification SM or SN with
the words
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or
“RESOURCE CONSERVING”
or
ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can
be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst
mark)
5W-30 synthetic oil is required for
optimum engine performance and pro-
tection. Conventional oil may be used if
synthetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 5W-30 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if replenishment is needed but
should be changed to 5W-30 synthetic
oil at the next oil change.
– Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
Specifications
12-7
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (412,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12-8 Specifications
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature Oil capacity
Manual transmission
API classification GL-5
3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
Front differential
(AT models)
1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
Rear differential
0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
For the checking procedure, or other details, refer to “Manual transmission oil” F11-19, “Front differential gear oil (AT models)” F11-21, “Rear differential
gear oil” F11-22.
Black plate (413,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Fluids
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
Fluid
Fluid type Fluid capacity
Automatic transmission fluid (AT models)
· SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid
· SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
· “Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid
–
Clutch fluid (MT models)
–
For the checking procedure, or other details, refer to “Automatic transmission fluid” F11-20, “Power steering fluid” F11-22, “Brake fluid” F11-23 or
“Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-24.
& Engine coolant
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
Model Coolant capacity Coolant type
Non-turbo
Manual transmission 7.5 US qt (7.1 liters, 6.2 Imp qt)
SUBARU Super CoolantAutomatic transmission 7.4 US qt (7.0 liters, 6.2 Imp qt)
Turbo
8.5 US qt (8.0 liters, 7.0 Imp qt)
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure, or other details, refer to “Cooling system” F11-13.
Specifications
12-9
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (414,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12-10 Specifications
& Tires
Tire size P215/65R16 96H P225/55R17 95H
Wheel size 16 6 6
1
/
2
J166 6
1
/
2
JJ 17 6 7J 176 7JJ
Pressure Front
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm
2
) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary
spare tire
Size T155/70 D17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening torque
72 lbf·ft (100 N·m, 10 kgf·m)*
1
,*
2
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*2: For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-6.
NOTE
For the Latin American models, a conventional tire is equipped in place of a temporary spare tire.
Black plate (415,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 20A
. Trailer
2 Empty
3 15A
. Door locking
4 10A
. Front wiper deicer relay
5 10A
. Combination meter
6 7.5A
. Remote control rear
view mirrors
. Seat heater relay
7 15A
. Combination meter
. Integrated unit
8 20A
. Stop light
9 15A
. Front wiper deicer
10 7.5A
. Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A
. Turn signal unit
. Clock
12 15A
. Automatic transmission
unit
. Engine control unit
. Integrated unit
13 20A
. Accessory power outlet
(center console)
14 15A
. Parking light
. Tail light
. Rear combination light
15 Empty (FWD connector for
AWD AT models)
Specifications
12-11
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (416,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12-12 Specifications
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
16 10A
. Illumination
17 15A
. Seat heaters
18 10A
. Backup light
19 Empty
20 10A
. Accessory power outlet
(instrument panel)
21 7.5A
. Starter relay
22 15A
. Air conditioner
. Rear window defogger
relay coil
23 15A
. Rear wiper
. Rear window washer
24 15A
. Audio unit
. Clock
25 15A
. SRS airbag system
26 7.5A
. Power window relay
. Radiator main fan relay
. Tail and illumination re-
lay
27 15A
. Blower fan
28 15A
. Blower fan
29 15A
. Fog light
30 30A
. Front wiper
31 7.5A
. Auto air conditioner unit
. Integrated unit
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
32 Empty
33 7.5A
. ABS/Vehicle Dynamics
Control unit
Black plate (417,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
A) Main fuse
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 30A
. ABS unit
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
2 25A
. Main fan (cooling fan)
3 10A
. Secondary air combina-
tion valve (turbo models)
4 25A
. Sub fan (cooling fan)
5 Empty
6 10A
. Audio
7 30A
. Headlight (low beam)
8 15A
. Headlight (high beam)
9 20A
. Back-up
10 15A
. Horn
11 25A
. Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
12 15A
. Fuel pump
13 10A
. Automatic transmission
control unit
14 7.5A
. Engine control unit
15 15A
. Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher
16 15A
. Tail and illumination re-
lay
17 7.5A
. Alternator
Specifications
12-13
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (418,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12-14 Specifications
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
18 15A
. Headlight (right hand)
19 15A
. Headlight (left hand)
Black plate (419,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Bulb chart
Lights A and B are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
Specifications 12-15
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (420,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12-16 Specifications
Wattage Bulb No.
1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
2) Parking light
12V-5W
168 (W5W)
3) Low beam headlight
Models with HID light 12V-35W D2R
Models with halogen light 12V-55W H11
4) Front side marker light 12V-5W 168 (W5W)
5) Map light 12V-8W –
6) Dome light 12V-8W –
7) Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
8) Front turn signal light 12V-21W
(WY21W)
9) Door step light
12V-5W –
10) Cargo area light 12V-13W –
11) Stop light/Tail light
12V-21/5W 7443 (W21/5W)
12) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W (WY21W)
13) Backup light 12V-21W 7440
14) Licence plate light 12V-5W 168 (W5W)
A)
High-mounted stop light ––
B)
Side turn signal light (if equipped) –
–
WARNING
. Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing
bulbs, turn off the lights and wait
until the bulbs cool down. Other-
wise, there is a risk of burn injury.
. For models with HID low beam
headlights, observe the following
precautions. Not doing so carries
the risk of an electric shock that
could result in serious injury
because the HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage.
– Do not replace any headlight
bulbs (both low beam and
high beam) by yourself.
– Do not remove/restore the
headlight assemblies by your-
self.
– Do not remove any headlight-
assembly components by
yourself.
For replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (421,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Specifications 12-17
12
Black plate (422,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
12-18 Specifications
Vehicle identification
1) Vehicle identification number
2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
Black plate (25,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2
Tire information.................................................. 13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-9
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ............................................... 13-13
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-13
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-13
Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-14
Treadwear ....................................................... 13-14
Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-14
Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-15
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Black plate (426,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A.
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
Tire information
& Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These markings
can provide you with useful infor-
mation on the tire.
! Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a break-
down of its individual elements.
! P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passen-
ger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-
tions
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Sec-
ond, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
Black plate (427,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580
kg).
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and prede-
termined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded,
or otherwise altered from
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re-
treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui-
table for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review
of the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) Manufact urer ’s Identification
Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
! Other markings
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire may be
inf lated. For example, “300 kPa
(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (428,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction typ e
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-
WALL 2 POLYESTER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG)
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
quality grading standards” F13-14
.
& Recommended tire inflation
pressure
! Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure
For recommended cold tire inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
refer to “Tires” F12-10
.
! Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
! Adverse safety consequences
of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
Black plate (429,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper in-
flation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a
short distance warms up the tires
and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected
by the outside temperature. It is
best to check tire pressure out-
doors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-in-
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when in-
flated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side-
wall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (430,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
face of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has
a particular side that must al-
ways face outward when mount-
ing on a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehic le weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
cle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, de corations, or
protective bands or ribs.
Black plate (431,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passen-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rub-
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special
trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ignation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance betwee n rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or
protective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber com-
pound from the cord material in
the sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (432,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumfer-
entially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its shar e of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal oc-
cupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is ap-
pended to the end of this section)
and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
Black plate (433,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
& Tire care – maintenance and
safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visi-
ble. When a tire’s tread wear
indicator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
For information about the tire rota-
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation”
F11-35
.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (434,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Replace an y damaged or u n-
evenly worn tires at the time of
rotation. After tire rotation, adjust
the tire pressures and make sure
the wheel nuts are correctly tigh-
tened. For information about the
tightening torque and tightening
sequence for the wheel nuts, refer
to “Flat tires” F9-6
.
& Vehicle load limit – how to
determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown o n the
vehicle placard attached to the
driver ’s side B-pillar. Locate the
statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
The vehicle placard also shows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all pas-
sengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
For information about vehicle load-
ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
F8-12
.
For information about towing capa-
city and weight limits, refer to
“Trailer towing” F8-18
.
! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seating con-
figurations
Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupan ts and cargo
should never exceed 900 lbs or
408 kg”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
kg).
Black plate (435,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calcula-
tions are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (436,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 408 kg or
900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
Black plate (437,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are de signed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the driver’s door.
The GVWR and fr ont an d rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety conse-
quences of overloading on
handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, and
vehicle and tire performance in the
following ways. This could lead to
an accident and possibly result in
severe personal injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other body parts could break or
experience accelerated wear that
will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weigh t of occupant s and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (438,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capa-
city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6
150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your ve-
hicle.
Uniform tire quality grading
standards
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
perature A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passen-
ger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
ary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
All passenger car tires must con-
form to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades.
& Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-
1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
Black plate (439,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accel-
eration, cornering, hydroplan-
ing, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
& Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car t ires mu st me et und er th e
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or ex-
cessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possi-
ble tire failure.
Reporting safety defects
(U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which coul d cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehi-
cles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-
424-9153); go to http://www.safe-
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave-
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-15
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (440,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
nue, SE, West Building, Washing-
ton, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Black plate (27,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Index
14
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
14-2 Index
A
Abbreviation ................................................................... 3
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-23
Warning light ......................................................... 3-19
Accessories....................................................... 5-4, 11-45
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-9
Active head restraint..................................................... 1-6
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-15
Air conditioner
Manual climate control system ................................... 4-8
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-11
Airflow selection
Automatic climate control system ............................... 4-6
Manual climate control system ................................... 4-8
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-14
All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-21
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-37
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3
Antenna system........................................................... 5-3
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-23
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-15
Armrest....................................................................... 1-8
Ashtray..................................................................... 6-11
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-17
Audio
Antenna system....................................................... 5-3
Auxiliary input jack ................................................. 5-29
Bluetooth
®
audio.................................................... 5-40
CD player operation ............................................... 5-22
Control button........................................................ 5-37
FM/AM radio operation ........................................... 5-13
iPod
®
operations .................................................... 5-32
Power and audio controls ......................................... 5-9
Satellite radio operations ......................................... 5-18
Set ........................................................................ 5-4
USB storage device operations ................................ 5-32
Auto-dimming mirror/compass .............................. 3-36, 3-38
Automatic climate control system................................... 4-6
Automatic headlight beam leveler ................................. 3-31
Warning light.......................................................... 3-21
Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-15
Fluid ........................................................... 11-20, 12-9
MANUAL mode ...................................................... 7-19
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-17
Select lever ........................................................... 7-16
Shift lock function ................................................... 7-17
SPORT mode ........................................................ 7-20
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-13
Auxiliary input jack...................................................... 5-29
B
Battery .................................................................... 11-43
Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-5
Jump starting ......................................................... 9-10
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-12
Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-10
Bluetooth
®
audio ........................................................ 5-40
Booster seat .............................................................. 1-28
Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-9
Brake
Assist.................................................................... 7-22
Booster ....................................................... 7-22, 11-25
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Fluid............................................................ 11-23, 12-9
Pad and lining ...................................................... 11-28
Parking........................................................ 7-29, 11-29
Pedal .................................................................. 11-26
System ................................................................. 7-22
Brake pedal
Free play ............................................................. 11-26
Reserve distance .................................................. 11-26
Brake system ............................................................ 7-22
Warning light ......................................................... 3-20
Braking..................................................................... 7-22
Tips...................................................................... 7-22
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-28
Bulb
Chart.................................................................. 12-15
Replacing............................................................. 11-45
C
Cargo area
Cover ................................................................... 6-14
Light............................................................. 6-3, 11-50
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-15
Cargo tray................................................................. 10-6
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Center
Console .................................................................. 6-5
Changing
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-6
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-11
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-17
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
light ....................................................................... 3-15
Checking
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-26
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-26
Clutch function ..................................................... 11-27
Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-27
Coolant level........................................................ 11-14
Fluid level (automatic transmission fluid).................. 11-20
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-23
Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-24
Fluid level (power steering fluid) .. ........................... 11-22
Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-37
Oil level (engine oil) ................................................ 11-9
Oil level (front differential gear oil) .......................... 11-21
Oil level (manual transmission oil) .......................... 11-19
Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-22
Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-28
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-25
Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-29
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-32
Child safety ................................................................... 5
Locks.................................................................... 2-19
Chime
Key........................................................................ 3-5
Light ..................................................................... 3-29
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-13
Cigarette lighter.......................................................... 6-10
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Index 14-3
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
14-4 Index
Ventilation grille ..................................................... 4-10
Climate control system ................................................. 4-2
Automatic................................................................ 4-6
Manual ................................................................... 4-8
Clock........................................................................ 3-25
Clutch
Fluid............................................................ 11-24, 12-9
Pedal .................................................................. 11-27
Coat hook ................................................................. 6-13
Coin tray..................................................................... 6-7
Compass .......................................................... 3-36, 3-38
Console ...................................................................... 6-5
Continuously variable transmission
Fluid..................................................................... 12-9
Coolant............................................................ 11-14, 12-9
Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-16
Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-16
Cooling system......................................................... 11-13
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-32
Indicator light......................................................... 3-24
Set indicator light ........................................... 3-25, 7-32
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-8
Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-8
Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-8
D
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-30
Defogger................................................................... 3-44
Defrosting ................................................................. 4-10
Deicer ...................................................................... 3-44
Differential gear oil
Front........................................................... 11-21, 12-8
Rear ........................................................... 11-22, 12-8
Dimensions................................................................ 12-2
Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-17
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-23
Dome light......................................................... 6-2, 11-50
Door
Locks..................................................................... 2-4
Open warning light.................................................. 3-21
Step light............................................................. 11-50
Drive belts ............................................................... 11-18
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-21
AWD models........................................................... 8-5
Car phone/cell phone.................................................. 8
Drinking..................................................................... 7
Drugs........................................................................ 7
Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Pets.......................................................................... 8
Snowy and icy roads .............................................. 8-10
Tips ......................................................... 7-14, 8-2, 8-5
Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 7
Winter .................................................................... 8-8
E
ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-11
Electrical system ........................................................ 12-3
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system... 3-20, 7-24
Warning ................................................................ 3-20
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................. 1-13
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Engine
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-7
Coolant........................................................ 11-14, 12-9
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2
Hood .................................................................... 11-5
Oil................................................................ 11-9, 12-5
Overheating .......................................................... 9-13
Starting................................................................... 7-7
Stopping ................................................................. 7-9
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-6
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-12
Fluid level
Automatic transmission .......................................... 11-20
Brake .................................................................. 11-23
Clutch.................................................................. 11-24
Power steering ..................................................... 11-22
Fog light
Bulb ................................................................... 12-15
Indicator light......................................................... 3-25
Switch .................................................................. 3-32
Folding mirror switch .................................................. 3-44
Front
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-21, 12-8
Fog light ..................................................... 3-32, 12-15
Fog light indicator light............................................ 3-25
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-20
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-48
Front seats.................................................................. 1-2
Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-3
Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-5
Power seat ............................................................. 1-4
Reclining ................................................................ 1-3
Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2
Consumption indicator............................................. 3-26
Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-3
Gauge................................................................... 3-10
Requirements ................................................. 7-2, 12-4
Fuses ..................................................................... 11-44
Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-11
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-13
Glove box................................................................... 6-5
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-13
H
Hands-free system...................................................... 5-42
Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-5, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat............................................................... 1-5
Rear seat ............................................................... 1-8
Headlight
Beam leveler.......................................................... 3-31
Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-45
Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-15
Control switch ........................................................ 3-29
Flasher.................................................................. 3-30
Index 14-5
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
14-6 Index
Indicator light......................................................... 3-25
HID headlights...................................................... 1, 11-45
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-24
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-30
Hill start assist (MT models) ............................... 7-31, 11-27
Warning light ......................................................... 3-21
HomeLink
®
................................................................ 3-38
Hook
Cargo tie-down ...................................................... 6-15
Coat ..................................................................... 6-13
Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-13
Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-14
Horn......................................................................... 3-47
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-14
I
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3
Light....................................................................... 3-5
Illuminated entry .......................................................... 2-9
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-31
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3
Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-23
Indicator light
Coolant temperature low ......................................... 3-16
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-24
Cruise control set................................................... 3-25
Front fog light ........................................................ 3-25
Headlight .............................................................. 3-25
High beam ............................................................ 3-24
Immobilizer............................................................ 3-23
Security ................................................................ 3-23
Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-24
SPORT mode ........................................................ 3-24
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-24
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-23
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-22
Information display...................................................... 3-26
Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-36
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
iPod
®
operations ........................................................ 5-32
J
Jack and jack handle ................................................... 9-5
Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-6
Jump starting ............................................................. 9-10
K
Key............................................................................ 2-2
Number .................................................................. 2-2
Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5
Replacement........................................................... 2-3
Keyless entry system ................................................... 2-7
L
Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5
License plate light..................................................... 11-49
Light
Backup ............................................................... 11-48
Cargo area .................................................... 6-3, 11-50
Control switch ........................................................ 3-29
Daytime running ..................................................... 3-30
Dome............................................................ 6-2, 11-50
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Door step............................................................. 11-50
Front fog............................................................... 3-32
Front side marker................................................. 12-15
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-5
License plate........................................................ 11-49
Map ............................................................. 6-3, 11-50
Parking................................................................ 11-48
Rear combination.................................................. 11-48
Stop light ............................................................. 11-48
Tail light ............................................................... 11-48
Turn signal ................................................... 3-31, 11-48
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-12
Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-21
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-18
Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-29
M
Maintenance
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-19
Tools ...................................................................... 9-4
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) ... 3-15
Manual
Climate control system ............................................. 4-8
Seat ....................................................................... 1-3
Transmission ......................................................... 7-13
Transmission oil............................................ 11-19, 12-8
Map light........................................................... 6-3, 11-50
Maximum load limits................................................... 8-18
Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-6
Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-44
Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-36
Moonroof................................................................... 2-24
N
New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer/Trip meter .................................................... 3-8
Oil filter ................................................................... 11-11
Oil level
Engine .................................................................. 11-9
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-21
Manual transmission ............................................. 11-19
Rear differential gear ............................................ 11-22
Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-17
On-road and off-road driving ...................................... 9, 8-6
Outside
Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-44
Mirrors .................................................................. 3-43
Temperature indicator.............................................. 3-27
Overhead console ....................................................... 6-6
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13
P
Parking
Brake.................................................................... 7-29
Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-29
Light ................................................................... 11-48
Tips ...................................................................... 7-29
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Index 14-7
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
14-8 Index
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-2
Power
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-6
Outlets.................................................................... 6-9
Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-43
Seat ....................................................................... 1-4
Steering................................................................ 7-21
Steering fluid ................................................ 11-22, 12-9
Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-22, 1-59
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-7
R
Rear
Combination lights................................................. 11-48
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-22, 12-8
Gate............................................................. 2-23, 9-18
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-48
Rear seat.................................................................... 1-7
Center table ............................................................ 6-7
Folding down......................................................... 1-10
Reclining............................................................... 1-10
Rear view camera...................................................... 6-17
Rear window
Defogger............................................................... 3-44
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-35
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-41
Recommended
Automatic transmission fluid .................................... 12-9
Brake fluid............................................................. 12-9
Clutch fluid................................................... 11-24, 12-9
Engine oil.............................................................. 12-5
Front differential gear oil.......................................... 12-8
Manual transmission oil........................................... 12-8
Power steering fluid ................................................ 12-9
Rear differential gear oil .......................................... 12-8
Spark plugs ........................................................... 12-3
Refueling.................................................................... 7-3
Remote engine start system ......................................... 7-9
Remote keyless entry system ....................................... 2-7
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-28
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-39
Replacing
Air cleaner element............................................... 11-15
Battery (remote engine start transmitter) .................... 7-12
Battery (remote keyless entry system)....................... 2-10
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-11
Replacing bulbs ............................................. 11-45, 12-15
Backup light......................................................... 11-48
Cargo area light ................................................... 11-50
Dome light........................................................... 11-50
Door step light ..................................................... 11-50
Front position light ................................................ 11-48
Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-48
Headlight............................................................. 11-45
License plate light................................................. 11-49
Map light ............................................................. 11-50
Parking light......................................................... 11-48
Rear combination light .......................................... 11-48
Rear turn signal light............................................. 11-48
Stop light............................................................. 11-48
Tail light............................................................... 11-48
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Rocking the vehicle.................................................... 8-12
Roof molding and crossbar ......................................... 8-15
Roof rails .................................................................. 8-14
S
Safety
Precautions when driving ............................................. 5
Symbol ...................................................................... 2
Warnings ................................................................... 2
Satellite radio ............................................................ 5-18
Screensaver .............................................................. 5-55
Seat
Fabric................................................................... 10-5
Front ...................................................................... 1-2
Heater .................................................................... 1-6
Height adjustment .................................................... 1-4
Power..................................................................... 1-4
Rear....................................................................... 1-7
Seatbelt ................................................................. 5, 1-12
Fastening.............................................................. 1-13
Maintenance.......................................................... 1-19
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-20
Safety tips............................................................. 1-12
Warning light and chime ......................................... 3-13
Security
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-14
Immobilizer.............................................................. 2-3
Indicator light......................................................... 3-23
Shock sensors....................................................... 2-19
Select lever ............................................................... 7-16
Position indicator ................................................... 3-24
Shift lock function ................................................... 7-17
Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-19
Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-13
Snow tires ....................................................... 8-11, 11-29
Snowy and icy roads .................................................. 8-10
Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-10
Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-17, 12-3
Specifications............................................................. 12-2
Speedometer .............................................................. 3-8
SPORT mode ............................................................ 7-20
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-24
SRS
Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-47
Frontal airbag......................................................... 1-37
Side airbag ............................................................ 1-47
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 5, 1-33
SRS airbag system
Monitors ................................................................ 1-57
Servicing ............................................................... 1-58
Warning light.......................................................... 3-14
Starting the engine ...................................................... 7-7
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-6
Steering wheel
Power ................................................................... 7-21
Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-46
Stop light................................................................. 11-48
Stopping the engine..................................................... 7-9
Storage compartment................................................... 6-5
Sun shade................................................................. 2-26
Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-33
Index 14-9
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
14-10 Index
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5
T
Tachometer ............................................................... 3-10
Temperature gauge .................................................... 3-11
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-17
Coolant................................................................. 3-16
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-29, 1-32
Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-14
Tire
Chains.................................................................. 8-11
Inspection ............................................................ 11-31
Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-31
Replacement ........................................................ 11-35
Rotation............................................................... 11-35
Size and pressure................................................ 12-10
Types .................................................................. 11-29
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)....... 7-27, 9-9, 11-29
Warning light ......................................................... 3-18
Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-29
Tools .......................................................................... 9-4
Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-29, 1-32
Towing...................................................................... 9-14
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-17
Hooks................................................................... 9-14
Weight .................................................................. 8-18
Trailer
Connecting............................................................ 8-16
Hitch............................................................. 8-16, 8-21
Towing .................................................................. 8-18
Towing tips ............................................................ 8-23
Trip meter................................................................... 3-8
Turn signal
Indicator lights........................................................ 3-24
Lever .................................................................... 3-31
U
Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-16
USB storage device operations .................................... 5-32
V
Valet mode ................................................................ 2-17
Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-4
Vehicle
Capacity weight...................................................... 8-13
Identification ........................................................ 12-18
Symbols .................................................................... 3
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-23
OFF switch ............................................................ 7-27
Operation indicator light........................................... 3-22
System.................................................................. 7-25
Warning light.......................................................... 3-22
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
W
Warning and indicator lights ......................................... 3-12
Warning chimes
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-13
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
Warning light
ABS ..................................................................... 3-19
All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-21
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-17
Automatic headlight beam leveler............................. 3-21
Brake system ........................................................ 3-20
Charge ................................................................. 3-17
CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-15
Coolant temperature high........................................ 3-16
Door open............................................................. 3-21
Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-21
Low fuel................................................................ 3-21
Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-18
Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-17
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-14
Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-22
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-18
Washing ................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators......................................................... 11-34
Wheel
Aluminum............................................................. 11-37
Balance ............................................................... 11-33
Covers................................................................. 11-36
Nut tightening torque ...................................... 9-6, 12-10
Replacement ........................................................ 11-36
Windows................................................................... 2-20
Windshield
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-37
Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-34
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-39
Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-44
Winter
Driving ................................................................... 8-8
Tires ........................................................... 8-11, 11-29
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-33
Wiper deicer .............................................................. 3-44
Index 14-11
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A8180BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 4/ 5
GAS STATION REFERENCE
&
Fuel:
! Non-turbo models
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI
(90 RON) or higher.
! Turbo models
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91
AKI (95 RON) or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) is not available, regular
unleaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or
higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine perfor-
mance and driveability, it is required that you use premium
grade unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95
RON) or higher.
& Fuel octane rating:
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel octane rating” F7-2.
& Fuel capacity:
16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
& Engine oil:
Use only the following oils.
. API classification SM or SN with the words “ENERGY
CONSERVING” or “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
. or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified with the
ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
F12-5.
& Engine oil capacity:
Non-turbo models: 5.5 US qt (5.2 liters, 4.6 Imp qt)
Turbo models: 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
checked using the oil level gauge. For more details about
maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-9.
& Cold tire pressure:
Refer to “Tires” F12-10.
